Toyota OM33A27U
User Manual: Toyota 2012 Toyota Camry Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 532 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
1Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks,
mirrors, and steering column.
2When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3Interior fea-
tures Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in-
terior features for a comfortable driving experience.
4Maintenance
and care Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-
yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5When trouble
arises What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat
tire, or is involved in an accident.
6Vehicle
specifications Detailed vehicle information.
7For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt
and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this
manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
2
1-1. Key information
Keys ..................................... 28
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors and
trunk
Smart key system................. 32
Wireless remote control ....... 46
Doors.................................... 52
Trunk.................................... 58
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats ........................... 62
Rear seats............................ 65
Head restraints..................... 67
Seat belts ............................. 69
Steering wheel ..................... 76
Anti-glare inside rear
view mirror.......................... 77
Outside rear view mirrors ..... 79
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows .................... 81
Moon roof............................. 84
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap .... 88
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system... 92
Alarm .................................... 95
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ......... 98
SRS airbags ....................... 100
Front passenger occupant
classification system......... 113
Child restraint systems ....... 118
Installing child restraints ..... 122
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle .............. 134
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without a
smart key system) ............ 145
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with a smart
key system) ...................... 148
Automatic transmission
(vehicles without
paddle shift switches) ....... 155
Automatic transmission
(vehicles with paddle
shift switches)................... 159
Turn signal lever................. 166
Parking brake ..................... 167
Horn.................................... 168
1Before driving
2When driving
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ............ 169
Indicators and warning
lights ................................. 179
2-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch.................. 185
Fog light switch ................... 192
Windshield wipers and
washer .............................. 194
2-4. Using other driving
systems
Cruise control...................... 199
Driving assist systems ........ 203
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ... 208
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage ............. 213
Vehicle load limits ............... 217
Winter driving tips ............... 218
Trailer towing ...................... 222
Dinghy towing ..................... 223
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Manual air conditioning
system.............................. 226
Automatic air
conditioning system.......... 233
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers ......................... 240
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types ............ 242
Using the radio ................... 248
Using the CD player ........... 251
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs ....................... 257
Operating an iPod .............. 264
Operating a USB
memory ............................ 272
Optimal use of the audio
system.............................. 280
Using the AUX port............. 283
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................. 285
• Interior lights..................... 286
• Personal lights.................. 287
3Interior features
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
4
3-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features....... 289
• Glove box......................... 290
• Console box ..................... 291
• Coin holder....................... 292
• Bottle holders ................... 293
• Cup holders...................... 294
• Auxiliary boxes................. 296
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors .......................... 298
Vanity mirrors ..................... 299
Clock .................................. 300
Outside temperature
display.............................. 301
Ashtray............................... 303
Power outlets ..................... 304
Seat heaters....................... 307
Armrest............................... 309
Coat hooks......................... 310
Floor mat............................ 311
Trunk features.................... 313
Garage door opener........... 315
Compass............................ 322
Safety Connect................... 326
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ........... 334
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior ............ 337
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements .................... 340
General maintenance ......... 342
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs .......................... 346
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions....................... 347
Hood................................... 350
Positioning a floor jack........ 351
Engine compartment .......... 353
Tires.................................... 367
Tire inflation pressure......... 375
Wheels................................ 379
Air conditioning filter ........... 382
Wireless remote control/
electronic key battery ....... 384
Checking and replacing
fuses................................. 389
Light bulbs .......................... 401
4Maintenance and care
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ............ 414
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ........................... 415
If you think something is
wrong................................ 418
Fuel pump shut off
system .............................. 419
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... .......................... 420
If you have a flat tire............ 435
If the engine will not start .... 447
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P............... 449
If you lose your keys ........... 450
If the electronic key does
not operate properly.......... 451
If the battery is
discharged ........................ 454
If your vehicle overheats..... 459
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ................................. 462
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency........................ 463
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 466
Fuel information.................. 478
Tire information .................. 481
6-2. Customization
Customizable features........ 493
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize................. 499
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners ................ 502
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)........................ 503
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)........................ 505
Abbreviation list........................ 516
Alphabetical index .................... 518
What to do if... .......................... 528
5When trouble arises 6Vehicle specifications
7For owners
Index
7
Tires
●Rotation
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure
●Information
P. 367
P. 435
P. 474
P. 481
Trunk
P. 58
Doors
P. 52
Rear turn signal lights
P. 166
Rear window defogger
P. 240
Stop/tail lights
P. 185
Rear side marker light
P. 185
Fuel filler door
P. 88
: If equipped
*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
*
2
: For vehicles with a Display Audio system, refer to “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”.
Camera , *1, *2
License plate lights
P. 185
9
A
Vehicles without moon roof
Vanity mirrors
P. 299
Sun visors
P. 298
Auxiliary box
P. 296
Personal lights
P. 287
SRS curtain shield airbags
P. 100
Interior light
P. 286
Compass
P. 322
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
P. 77
Garage door opener switches
P. 315
Microphone , *1, *2
: If equipped
*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
*
2
: For vehicles with a Display Audio system, refer to “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”.
10
A
Moon roof switches
P. 84
Garage door opener switches
P. 315
“SOS” button
P. 326
Sun visors
P. 298
Vanity mirrors
P. 299
SRS curtain shield airbags
P. 100
Personal lights
Interior lights
P. 287
P. 286
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
P. 77
Compass
P. 322
Vehicles with moon roof
Microphone *1, *2
P. 326
Pictorial index Interior
Auxiliary box
P. 296
11
B
Window lock switch
P. 81
Outside rear view mirror switches
P. 79
Door lock switch
P. 52
Power window switches
P. 81
Inside lock button
P. 53
: If equipped
*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
*
2
: For vehicles with a Display Audio system, refer to “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”.
13
Gauges and meters
P. 169
Tilt and telescopic steering rock release lever
P. 76
Pictorial index Instrument panel
Audio system
Navigation system , *3
Display Audio system , *4
P. 242
Windshield wiper and washer switch
P. 194
Clock
P. 300
Tire pressure warning
reset switch
P. 368
Parking brake pedal
P. 167
Hood lock release
lever
P. 350
: If equipped
*3: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
*4: Refer to “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”.
Horn
P. 168
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles
with a smart key system)
P. 148
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch
P. 185
P. 166
P. 192
Fuel filler door opener
P. 88
Trunk opener
P. 58
Floor mat
P. 311
14
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch
P. 240
A
Air conditioning system
P. 233
Rear window defogger switch
Outside rear view mirror defogger switch
P. 240
P. 240
Air conditioning system
P. 226
Pictorial index Instrument panel
Automatic air conditioning system
Manual air conditioning system
Emergency flasher switch
P. 414
Emergency flasher switch
P. 414
Security indicator
P. 92, 95
Security indicator
P. 92, 95
15
B
Telephone switches , *1, *2
Type A
Audio remote control switches , *1, *2
Talk switch , *1, *2
Cruise control switch
P. 199
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without a smart
key system)
P. 145
: If equipped
*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
*
2
: For vehicles with a Display Audio system, refer to “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”.
19
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual covers all models and all equipment, including
options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound
coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel
evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota
vehicles are currently available on the market. You should know that Toyota
does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their
performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to,
or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products.
Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification
may not be covered under warranty.
20
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as:
●Multiport fuel injection system /sequential multiport fuel injection system
●Cruise control system
●Anti-lock brake system
●SRS airbag system
●Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or spe-
cial instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
21
Vehicle data recordings
Your Toyota is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record
certain data, such as:
• Engine speed
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options
with which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record con-
versations, sounds or pictures.
●Data usage
Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunc-
tions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if
the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner
●Usage of data collected through Safety Connect (U.S.mainland only)
If your Toyota has Safety Connect and if you have subscribed to those ser-
vices, please refer to the Safety Connect Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.
22
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed
to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fas-
tened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ-
ation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access
to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
23
●Disclosure of the EDR data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except
when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle)
is obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
However, if necessary, Toyota may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing
information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These compo-
nents may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote con-
trol batteries.
24
CAUTION
■General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-
ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-
cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis-
tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to
children.
25
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
Symbols used in illustrations
CAUTION
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause death or
serious injury to people. You are informed about what you must or must not do
in order to reduce the risk of death or serious injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to
the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its
equipment.
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do
not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation
(e.g. a lid opens).
26
Before driving 1
27
1-1. Key information
Keys................................... 28
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors and
trunk
Smart key system .............. 32
Wireless remote control ..... 46
Doors ................................. 52
Trunk.................................. 58
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats......................... 62
Rear seats.......................... 65
Head restraints................... 67
Seat belts........................... 69
Steering wheel ................... 76
Anti-glare inside rear
view mirror ....................... 77
Outside rear view
mirrors.............................. 79
1-4. Opening and closing
the windows and
moon roof
Power windows.................. 81
Moon roof........................... 84
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap................................... 88
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system ............................. 92
Alarm.................................. 95
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture....... 98
SRS airbags..................... 100
Front passenger
occupant classification
system ........................... 113
Child restraint systems..... 118
Installing child
restraints ........................ 122
28
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Vehicles without a smart key system (type A)
Master keys
Valet key
Key number plate
Vehicles without a smart key system (type B)
Master keys
Operating the wireless remote
control function (P. 46)
Valet key
Key number plate
Vehicles without a smart key system (type C)
Master keys
Operating the wireless remote
control function (P. 46)
Valet key
Key number plate
29
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart key system)
To take out the mechanical key,
push the release button and take
the key out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the
key only has grooves on one
side. If the key cannot be inserted
in a lock cylinder, turn it over and
re-attempt to insert it.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the
entry function does not operate
properly, you will need the
mechanical key. (P. 451)
Vehicles with a smart key system
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart key
system (P. 32)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 46)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
30
1-1. Key information
■When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 290)
Vehicles without a smart key system: Carry the master key for your own use
and provide the attendant with the valet key.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Remove the mechanical key for your own
use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.
■Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the
event that a key (without a smart key system) or mechanical key (with a
smart key system) is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer
using the key number plate. (P. 450)
■When riding in an aircraft (vehicles with a wireless remote control)
When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,
make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons
are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the
key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
31
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
NOTICE
■To prevent key damage
Observe the following:
●Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
●Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
●Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
●Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.
●Do not disassemble the keys.
●Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the key.
●Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as
TVs, audio systems and glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment,
such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
■Carrying the electronic key on your person (vehicles with a smart key
system)
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appli-
ances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances
within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing
the key to not function properly.
■In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related prob-
lems (vehicles with a smart key system)
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to
your Toyota dealer.
■When a vehicle key is lost (vehicles with a smart key system)
If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit
your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was
provided with your vehicle.
32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart key system
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the
electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Unlocks and locks the doors (P. 33)
Unlocks the trunk (P. 33)
Starts the engine (P. 148)
Electronic key
Electronic key Electronic key
: If equipped
33
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Unlocking and locking the doors (front door handles only)
Grip the driver’s door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passen-
ger’s door handle to unlock all
the doors.*
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are
locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (P. 38)
Touch the lock sensor (the
indentation on the side of the
door handle) to lock the doors.
Unlocking the trunk
Press the button to unlock the
trunk.
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Antenna location and effective range
■Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
Antenna outside the trunk
Antenna inside the trunk
Antennas inside the cabin
35
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is
detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
either of the front outside
door handles. (Only the
doors detecting the key can
be operated.)
When unlocking the trunk
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
the trunk release button.
When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
■Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that
the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor
■Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning lights are
used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable accidents resulting
from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures for the warning light
that comes on. (P. 427)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures
when only alarms are sounded.
Use your palm to touch the lock sensor.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
5 seconds
An attempt was made to
lock the doors using the
smart key system while the
electronic key was still
inside the vehicle.
Retrieve the elec-
tronic key from the
passenger compart-
ment and lock the
doors again.
The trunk was closed while
the electronic key was still
inside the trunk and all the
doors were locked.
Retrieve the elec-
tronic key from the
trunk and close the
trunk lid.
An attempt was made to
lock the vehicle while a
door was open.
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.
37
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. (How-
ever, depending on the location of the electronic key, the key may be
detected as being in the vehicle. In this case, vehicle may be unlocked.)
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm
pings once and
exterior alarm
sounds once for
5 seconds
An attempt was made to
lock either front door by
opening a door and putting
the inside lock button into
the lock position, then
closing the door with the
electronic key still inside
the vehicle.
Retrieve the elec-
tronic key from the
vehicle and lock the
doors again.
Interior alarm
sounds continu-
ously
The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was turned
to ACCESSORY mode
while the driver's door was
open (The driver's door
was opened when the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch was in ACCES-
SORY mode.)
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
off and close the
driver’s door.
The driver’s door was
opened while any shift
position other than P was
selected without turning off
the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
Shift the shift lever to
P.
38
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless
remote control.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and
hold , , or for about 5 seconds while pressing and
holding .
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below.
(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at
least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.)
Vehicles with an alarm system: To prevent unintended triggering of the
alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open and
close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If a door is not
opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked
again and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 95)
STEP
1
STEP
2
Unlocking doors Beep
Holding the driver's door handle
unlocks only the driver's door. Exterior: Beeps 3 times
Interior: Beeps once
Holding the front passenger’s door
handle unlocks all the doors.
Holding either front door handle
unlocks all the doors.
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Beeps once
39
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the elec-
tronic key battery and the vehicle battery from being discharged while the
vehicle is not in operation for a long time.
●In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to
unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m)
of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
• The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.
●If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the
doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this
case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote
control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
■Electronic key battery-saving function
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping
the electronic key from receiving radio waves.
Press twice while pressing and
holding . Confirm that the electronic
key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the
smart key system cannot be used. To
cancel the function, press any of the elec-
tronic key buttons.
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations,
the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and
engine immobilizer system from operating properly.
(Ways of coping: P. 451)
●When the electronic key battery is depleted
●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
●When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
●When other wireless key (that emit radio waves) is being used nearby
●When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that
emit radio waves
• A portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless com-
munication device
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio
waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
●When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic
devices
41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■Notes for the entry function
●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection
areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle,
near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or
unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to
the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or
floor, in the door pockets or glove box, or near a vent when the engine
is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes are changed.
●Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the
door pockets or a vent when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio
wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the
cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trap-
ping the electronic key inside the vehicle.
●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may
be locked or unlocked by anyone.
●Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to
start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
●The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door
handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is
within the effective range. (The door will automatically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
●If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the elec-
tronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not
be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to
unlock the doors.)
●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door
handle again.
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Notes for locking the doors
●Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent
lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.
●When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition
signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recogni-
tion signals will be given.
●If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the
effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case,
follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the
vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key
system. (P. 39)
●If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet
during a car wash, a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the
alarm, lock all the doors.
●The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice,
snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again.
■Notes for the unlocking function
●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door
handle again.
●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
Remove the gloves and touch the sensor on the back of the handle
again.
●If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the
effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case,
follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the
vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key
system. (P. 39)
●If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly
longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
43
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
●To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft.
(2 m) of the vehicle.
●The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. (P. 493)
■Alarm (if equipped)
Using the smart key system to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
(P. 95)
■To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from
the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the
key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.
(The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may
not operate.)
■If the smart key system does not operate properly
●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 451)
●Starting the engine:P. 451
44
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Electronic key battery depletion
●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
●If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the
engine stops. (P. 427)
●As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will
become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following
symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted.
Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 386)
• The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft.
(1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Glass top ranges
• Table lamps
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 386
■If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting
●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the wireless remote control or
mechanical key. (P. 46, 451)
●Starting the engine and changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes: P. 452
●Stopping the engine: P. 149
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e. g. smart key system) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 493)
45
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■Certification for the smart key system
U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-4
FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-5
FCC ID: HYQ23AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14FBA
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep
away from the smart key system antennas. (P. 34)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,
the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such
as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves.
Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.
●Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers
and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
46
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Wireless remote control
: If equipped
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi-
cle.
Vehicles without a smart key system (type A)
Locks all the doors
Sounds the alarm
(press and hold)
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 5 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Opens the driver’s window
and moon roof (press and
hold)*
Unlocks the trunk
(press and hold)
*: This setting must be custom-
ized at your Toyota dealer.
47
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Vehicles without a smart key system (type B)
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 5 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Opens the driver’s window
and moon roof (press and
hold)*
Sounds the alarm
(press and hold)
Unlocks the trunk
(press and hold)
*: This setting must be custom-
ized at your Toyota dealer.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 5 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Opens the driver’s window
and moon roof (press and
hold)*
Unlocks the trunk
(press and hold)
Sounds the alarm
(press and hold)
*: This setting must be custom-
ized at your Toyota dealer.
48
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that
the doors have been locked/unlocked.
(Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
Driver’s window and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the driver’s
window and moon roof are opening.
■Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a
buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock
the vehicle once more.
■Panic mode
Vehicles without a smart key system
When is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm will
sound intermittently and the vehicle
lights will flash to deter any person from
trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the wireless remote control.
49
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Vehicles with a smart key system
■Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■Alarm (if equipped)
Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
(P. 95)
When is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm will
sound intermittently and the vehicle
lights will flash to deter any person from
trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the electronic key.
50
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Conditions affecting operation
Vehicles without a smart key system
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-
ing situations:
●When the wireless key battery is depleted
●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless commu-
nication devices
●When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic
object
●When other wireless key (that emit radio waves) is being used nearby
●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
Vehicles with a smart key system
P. 40
■If the wireless remote control does not operate properly (vehicles with
a smart key system)
Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 451)
■Key battery depletion
Vehicles without a smart key system
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 384)
Vehicles with a smart key system
P. 44
■When the key battery is fully depleted
P. 384
■Confirmation of the registered key number (vehicles with a smart key
system)
The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask
your Toyota dealer for details.
51
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 493)
■Certification for wireless remote control
U.S.A. (vehicles without a smart key system)
FCC ID: HYQ23AAC
FCC ID: HYQ12BDM
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
U.S.A. (vehicles with a smart key system)
FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-4
FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-5
FCC ID: HYQ23AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14FBA
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
52
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function,
wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.
■Entry function (vehicles with a smart key system)
P. 32
■Wireless remote control (if equipped)
P. 46
■Key
Turning the key operates the doors as follows:
Vehicles without a smart key system
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Driver’s side only: Turning the
key unlocks the driver's door.
Turning the key again unlocks
the other doors.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical
key. (P. 451)
■Door lock switch
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
53
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Locking the doors from the outside without a key
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
Close the door.
Vehicles without a smart key system
The door cannot be locked if either of the front doors is open and
the key is in the engine switch.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is
left inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
■Inside lock button
Unlocks the door
Locks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.
STEP
1
STEP
2
54
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock
is set.
Unlock
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
55
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or cancelled:
■Setting and canceling the functions (vehicles without naviga-
tion system and Display Audio system)
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure
below.
Vehicles without a smart key system
Close all the doors and turn the engine switch to the “ON”
position. (Perform step 2 within 10 seconds.)
Vehicles with a smart key system
Close all the doors and turn the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform step 2 within 10 sec-
onds.)
Function Operation
Shift position linked
door locking function
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all the
doors.
Shift position linked
door unlocking function
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all the
doors.
Speed linked door lock-
ing function
All the doors are locked when the vehicle
speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or
higher.
Driver's door linked
door unlocking function
(vehicles without a
smart key system)
All the doors are unlocked when the driver's
door is opened within 10 seconds after turn-
ing the engine switch to “ACC” or “LOCK”.
Driver's door linked
door unlocking function
(vehicles with a smart
key system)
All the doors are unlocked when the driver's
door is opened within 10 seconds after turn-
ing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
STEP
1
56
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Shift the shift lever to P or N, and
press and hold the driver's door
lock switch ( or ) for
approximately 5 seconds and
then release.
The shift lever and switch posi-
tions corresponding to the
desired function to be set are
shown in the following table.
Use the same procedure to can-
cel the function.
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are
locked and then unlocked.
STEP
2
Function Shift lever
position
Driver’s door lock
switch position
Shift position linked door lock-
ing function P
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
Speed linked door locking func-
tion N
Driver's door linked door unlock-
ing function
57
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■If a wrong key is used (vehicles with a smart key system)
The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.
■If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting
(vehicles with a smart key system)
Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P. 46, 451)
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 493)
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Always use a seat belt.
●Always lock all the doors.
●Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
●Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi-
cle and it may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even
if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
●Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear
seats.
58
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the key, trunk opener, entry function
or wireless remote control.
■Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Pull up the lever to release the
trunk lid.
■Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
Key (vehicles without a wireless remote control)
Turn the master key clockwise
to release the trunk lid.
Entry function (vehicles with a smart key system)
P. 32
Wireless remote control (if equipped)
P. 46
59
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■Trunk light
The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
■Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key
inside (vehicles with a smart key system)
●When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic
key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened using the entry function.
●Even when the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors
locked, the key confinement prevention function can be activated so the
trunk can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys
with you when leaving the vehicle.
●Even when the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors are
locked, the key may not be detected depending on the places and the
surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement pre-
vention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the
trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before closing the
trunk.
●The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one
of the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk
opener.
■Internal trunk release lever
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling up
the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the
inside of the trunk lid.
The lever will continue to glow for some
time after the trunk lid is closed.
60
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
●Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug-
gage in the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-
ous health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.
●Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the
trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, caus-
ing an accident.
●Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a colli-
sion, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffo-
cate.
●Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
61
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in seri-
ous injury.
●Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before
opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again
after it is opened.
●When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the
surrounding area is safe.
●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the trunk is about to open or close.
●Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.
●Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk
lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed
again after it is opened.
●The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened
fully. It is more difficult to open or close
the trunk lid on an incline than on a
level surface, so beware of the trunk lid
unexpectedly opening or closing by
itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully
open and secure before using the
trunk.
●When closing the trunk lid, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
●When closing the trunk lid, make sure
to press it lightly on its outer surface.
62
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Manual seat
Seat position adjustment
lever
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Vertical height adjustment
lever (driver’s side only)
63
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Power seat
Seat position adjustment switch
Seatback angle adjustment switch
Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch (driver’s side only)
Vertical height adjustment switch (driver’s side only)
Lumbar support adjustment switch (driver’s side only)
64
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment
●To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect-
edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is
locked in position.
65
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Rear seats
Folding down the rear seatbacks
Pull the seatback lever in the
trunk for the seatback you wish
to fold down.
The seatbacks of the rear seats can be folded down.
CAUTION
■When folding the rear seatbacks down
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
●Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
●Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to P.
●Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the trunk while driv-
ing.
●Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
66
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■When returning the seat to its original position
●Ensure that the seat belt does not get caught between or behind the seats.
●If the seat belt has been released from its guide, pass the seat belt through
its guide. (P. 72)
■Seat adjustment
Be careful not to get hands or feet pinched between the rear console box
and the rear seat when folding down the rear seatback.
■After returning the seatback to the upright position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
●Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pressing it forward and rear-
ward on the top.
●Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
●Make sure that the seat belt is passing through its guide.
NOTICE
■When left seatback is folded down
Make sure the luggage loaded in the enlarged trunk will not damage the
webbing of the rear center seat belt.
67
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Head restraints
■Removing the head restraints (front seats)
■Installing the head restraints (front seats)
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Vertical adjustment (front
seats)
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.
Lock release
button
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.
Align the head restraint with the installa-
tion holes and push it down to the lock
position.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.
68
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Adjusting the height of the head restraints (front seats)
CAUTION
■Head restraint precautions (front seats)
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
●After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
●Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
69
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle.
■Correct use of the seat belts
●Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not
come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoul-
der.
●Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips.
●Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight
and well back in the seat.
●Do not twist the seat belt.
■Fastening and releasing the seat belt
To fasten the seat belt, push
the plate into the buckle
until a click sound is heard.
To release the seat belt,
press the release button.
Release button
70
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occu-
pant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal or
side collision.
The pretensioner may not acti-
vate in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a minor side impact, a
rear impact or a vehicle rollover.
■Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing
the release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up
and down as needed until you
hear a click.
71
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be
extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once
more. (P. 122)
■Pregnant women
■People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 69)
■Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 118)
●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat
belt, follow the instructions on P. 69 regarding seat belt usage.
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (P. 69)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the
hips in the same manner as other occu-
pants. Extend the shoulder belt com-
pletely over the shoulder and position the
belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact
over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus
could suffer death or serious injury as a
result of sudden braking or a collision.
72
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate
for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli-
sions.
■Seat belt extender
■Rear seat belt
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt
extender is available from your Toyota
dealer free of charge.
Use the seat belt after passing it through
the guide if the seat belt comes free from
the guide.
73
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or severe injury.
■Wearing a seat belt
●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
●Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
●Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
●To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than
necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■Seat belt pretensioners
●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt
pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of
a collision.
●If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In
that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at
your Toyota dealer.
74
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident. (P. 70)
■Seat belt damage and wear
●Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
●Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
●Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
●Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
●Always make sure the shoulder belt passes through the guide when using
the seat belt. Failure to properly position the belt may reduce the amount
of protection in an accident and could lead to death or serious injury in a
collision or sudden stop.
●Always make sure that the seat belt is not twisted, does not get caught in
the guide or the seatback and is arranged in the proper position.
75
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Using a seat belt extender
●Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without
the extender.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when
used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the
one originally intended.
NOTICE
■When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
76
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
■After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident, and resulting in death or serious injury.
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Hold the steering wheel and
push the lever down.
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever
up to secure the steering
wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
77
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by
using the following functions:
Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Normal position
Anti-glare position
Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of
vehicles behind and the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Turns automatic mode on/off
The indicator comes on when
automatic mode is turned on.
Vehicles without a smart key
system
The mirror will revert to the
automatic mode each time the
engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key
system
The mirror will revert to the
automatic mode each time the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode.
78
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
■To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view
mirror)
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
To ensure that the sensors operate prop-
erly, do not touch or cover them.
79
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Outside rear view mirrors
Folding the mirrors
Push the mirror back in the direc-
tion of the vehicle's rear.
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.
To select a mirror to adjust,
press the switch.
Left
Right
To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
STEP
1
STEP
2
80
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Mirror angle can be adjusted when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
■When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with mirror defoggers)
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 240)
CAUTION
■When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
●Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your
hand caught by the moving mirror.
■When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with mirror defog-
gers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.
81
1
Before driving
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
Window lock switch
Press the switch down to lock
the passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent chil-
dren from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window.
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
Closing
One-touch closing (driver’s
window only)*
Opening
One-touch opening (driver’s
window only)*
*: Pressing the switch in the
opposite direction will stop win-
dow travel partway.
82
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■The power windows can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
Vehicles without a smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They can-
not, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or
turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is
opened.
■Jam protection function (driver’s window only)
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame,
window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■When the power window does not close normally (driver’s window
only)
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot
be closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch
on the driver’s door.
●Vehicles without a smart key system: After stopping the vehicle, the win-
dow can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch
closing position while the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position.
●Vehicles with a smart key system: After stopping the vehicle, the window
can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch clos-
ing position while the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
●If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation
explained above, initialize the function by performing the following proce-
dure.
83
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position.
Continue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the win-
dow has closed.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position.
Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the win-
dow has opened completely.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position
once again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds
after the window has closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the
beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after perform-
ing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. key linked operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 493)
CAUTION
■Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in
some instances, even death.
■Jam protection function (driver’s window only)
●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window fully closes.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
84
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt
it up and down.
■Opening and closing
Opens
the moon roof
*
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully open position
to reduce wind noise.
Press the switch again to fully
open the moon roof.
Closes
the moon roof
*
*: Lightly press the switch in either
direction to stop the moon roof
partway.
■Tilt up and down
T
ilts the moon roof up
*
Tilts the moon roof down
*
*: Lightly press either of the moon
roof switches to stop the moon
roof partway.
: If equipped
85
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
■The moon roof can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off
Vehicles without a smart key system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. It cannot, however,
be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned
off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon
roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens
slightly.
■Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade
will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
86
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
●If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10
seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approxi-
mately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and
then release the switch.
●If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “UP” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the
tilt up position and stops.
Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP”
switch again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up
position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1
second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and
then release the switch.
*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to
be performed again from the beginning.
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause,
automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the
open/close switch in the close position or press and hold the “UP” switch.
The moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it
will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is
completely closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above proce-
dure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
87
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
■Moon roof open reminder function
Vehicles without a smart key system
An alarm will sound when the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof not
fully closed and the engine switch off.
Vehicles with a smart key system
An alarm will sound when the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof not
fully closed and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. key linked operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 493)
CAUTION
■Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehi-
cle while it is moving.
●Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bod-
ies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being
operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■Jam protection function
●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof fully closes.
88
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
■Before refueling the vehicle
Vehicles without a smart key system
Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and win-
dows are closed.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off and ensure that all
the doors and windows are closed.
■Opening the fuel tank cap
Pull up the opener to open the
fuel filler door.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to open.
STEP
1
STEP
2
89
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
STEP
3
90
1-5. Refueling
CAUTION
■When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do
so may result in death or serious injury.
●After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
●Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel tank.
●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
●Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
●Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
■When refueling
Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck. If fuel is added with
the nozzle slightly lifted away from the fuel filler neck, the automatic shut off
function may not operate, resulting in fuel overflowing from the tank.
■When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.
91
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
NOTICE
■Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's
painted surface.
92
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
engine from starting if a key has not been previously registered in
the vehicle's on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
Vehicles without a smart
key system
The indicator light flashes after
the key has been removed
from the engine switch to indi-
cate that the system is operat-
ing.
The indicator light stops flash-
ing after the registered key
has been inserted into the
engine switch to indicate that
the system has been can-
celed.
Vehicles with a smart key
system
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is
operating.
The indicator light stops flash-
ing after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
93
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
●If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
●If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
U.S.A.
Vehicles without a smart key system
FCC ID: WRKRI-34BTY
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Vehicles with a smart key system
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■Certifications for the immobilizer system
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
94
1-6. Theft deterrent system
NOTICE
■To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
95
1
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Before driving
Alarm
: If equipped
The system sounds the alarm and flashes the lights when forced
entry is detected.
■Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm
is set:
●A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other
than using the entry function, wireless remote control or
mechanical key.
●The hood is opened.
●Some models: The window is tapped or broken.
■Setting the alarm system
Close the doors, trunk and
hood, and lock all the doors.
The system will be set auto-
matically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes
from being on to flashing when
the system is set.
96
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure
of the following:
●Nobody is in the vehicle.
●The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
●No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm.
●Unlock the doors or trunk.
●Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch
to the “ACC” or “ON” position, or start the engine. (The alarm
will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
●Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or
start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped
after a few seconds.)
97
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
■Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations.
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the system.)
■Alarm-operated door lock
●When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to pre-
vent intruders.
●Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and
make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing
the battery.
NOTICE
■To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
●A person inside the vehicle opens a
door, the trunk or hood.
●The battery is recharged or replaced
when the vehicle is locked.
98
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 62)
Adjust the position of the
seat forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached and easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 62)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily oper-
able.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the air-
bag is facing your chest.
(P. 76)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 67)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 69)
99
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■While driving
●Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.
●Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury. The adjustment mechanism may
also be damaged.
■Adjusting the seat position
●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving seat.
●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
100
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the
risk of death or serious injury.
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front pas-
senger from impact with interior components
SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS rear side airbags
Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats
101
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
SRS airbag system components
Front impact sensors
Front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU
and sensors)
Knee airbags
Side impact sensors (front
door)
Side impact sensors (front)
Front passenger airbag
Front side airbags
Curtain shield airbags
Rear side airbags
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Airbag sensor assembly
Side impact sensors (rear)
Driver airbag
Driver’s seat belt buckle
switch
Seat belt pretensioners and
force limiters
SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats
102
1-7. Safety information
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag
sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on infor-
mation obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system compo-
nents diagram above. This information includes crash severity and
occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in
the inflators quickly fills the airbags with nontoxic gas to help restrain
the motion of the occupants.
103
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
●Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)
as well as the seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails,
may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
●The windshield may crack.
●For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event
of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emer-
gency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location
(without needing to push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to
speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assis-
tance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent
automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the
necessary emergency services. (P. 326)
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
●The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds
the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approxi-
mately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that
does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle
strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle and sign pole, which can move
or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision
(e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes
under, the bed of a truck etc.).
●Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt
pretensioners will activate.
●The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is
no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front
airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat,
even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 113)
104
1-7. Safety information
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield air-
bags)
●The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an
impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corre-
sponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb.
[1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpen-
dicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph
[20 - 30 km/h]).
●The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe
frontal collision.
■Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other
than a collision
The SRS front airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a
serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are
shown in the illustration.
●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or
hard surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●Landing hard or falling
105
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front air-
bags)
The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal
collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward
deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
●Collision from the side
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
106
1-7. Safety information
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags
(SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is
subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the
side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
SRS side airbags: Do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a fron-
tal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side colli-
sion.
SRS curtain shield airbags: Do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side colli-
sion.
●Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger com-
partment
●Collision from the side at an angle
●Collision from the front*
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
*: Depending on the conditions and type
of accident, the curtain shield airbags
may deploy (inflate) upon frontal
impact.
107
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
●The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS front airbags and SRS
curtain shield airbags to inflate.
●A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved
in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side and cur-
tain shield airbags to inflate.
●The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger air-
bag or lower portion of the instrument
panel is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
●The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
●The portion of the front pillars, rear pil-
lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)
containing the curtain shield airbags
inside is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
108
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm)
of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag pro-
vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in.
(250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several
ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in.
(250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, sim-
ply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of
your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm,
non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-
bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of
the instrument panel controls.
109
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-
bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
●Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-
tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 118)
●If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the front seat belt buckles but
the seat belt extender has not also
been fastened to the latch plate of the
seat belt, the SRS front airbags will
judge that the driver and front passen-
ger are wearing the seat belt even
though the seat belt has not been con-
nected. In this case, the SRS front air-
bags may not activate correctly in a
collision, resulting in death or serious
injury in the event of a collision. Be sure
to wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.
●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
110
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
●Do not allow the front seat occupants to
hold items on their knees.
●Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pil-
lars.
●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seats toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.
●Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board, steering wheel pad and lower
portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles
when the SRS driver, front passenger
and knee airbags deploy.
111
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of
these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious
injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.
●If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy,
be sure to remove it.
●Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such
accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable
the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.
●Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-
bag components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
●Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
●Do not attach anything to areas such as
a door, windshield glass, side door
glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail
and assist grip.
●Vehicles without a smart key system:
Do not attach any heavy, sharp or hard
objects such as keys and accessories
to the key. The objects may restrict the
SRS knee airbag inflation or be thrust
into the driver's seat area by the force
of the deploying airbag, thus causing a
danger.
112
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
●If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or
deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
●Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rails
●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment
●Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars or kan-
garoo bar etc.)
●Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
●Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD
players
●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
113
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classifica-
tion system. This system detects the conditions of the front passen-
ger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front
passenger.
SRS warning light
Seat belt reminder light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
114
1-7. Safety information
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■Adult*1
■Child*3 or child restraint system*4
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
ON”
SRS warning light Off
Seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Activated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”*5
SRS warning light Off
Seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seat Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
115
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■Unoccupied
■There is a malfunction in the system
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a
smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may rec-
ognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and pos-
ture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system
sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”
SRS warning light Off
Seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seat Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”
SRS warning light On
Seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
116
1-7. Safety information
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only
be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(P. 118)
*5: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual
on how to install the child restraint system properly. (P. 122)
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant
classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Wear the seat belt properly.
●Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
●Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using
the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat
belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, the SRS airbags for the passenger may not activate correctly,
which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
●Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment.
●Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or
feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
●Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
●Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
117
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
●Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear
seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of
a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seat-
back to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front
passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving.
Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the
seat belt system.
●If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the
passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and
with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still
remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or
if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
●When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat in the proper order. (P. 122)
●Do not modify or remove the front seats.
●Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Other-
wise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the
detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
●Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.
●Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that cov-
ers the seat cushion surface.
●Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
118
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint system on a rear
seat is much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.
●Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is
appropriate to the age and size of the child.
●For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the
child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(P. 122)
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be prop-
erly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder
belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the
use of child restraint systems.
119
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
according to the age and size of the child:
Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Forward facing Convertible seat
Booster seat
120
1-7. Safety information
■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
●If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear
seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 69)
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
●Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-
forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-
dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
●Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event
of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag
can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child
restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
●A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front pas-
senger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that
requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat
since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.
Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as
far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
121
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system
with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident.
●Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side
rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy
even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if
the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact
could cause death or serious injury to the child.
●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
■When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■When the child restraint system is not in use
●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use.
Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger com-
partment.
●If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
122
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a
seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is
not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
dren) system.
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the outer rear seats. (But-
tons displaying the location of
the anchors are attached to
the seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mecha-
nism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seat belt) (P. 69)
123
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Installation with LATCH system
Type A
Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback
slightly.
Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
Anchor brackets (for top tether
strap)
An anchor bracket is provided
for each rear seat.
STEP
1
Canada only
STEP
2
124
1-7. Safety information
Type B
Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback
slightly.
Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors. If the child
restraint has a top tether strap,
the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap
anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
STEP
1
Canada only
STEP
2
125
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child restraint system
on the rear seat facing the rear
of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it in
lock mode. In lock mode, the belt
cannot be extended.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
126
1-7. Safety information
While pushing the child restraint
system down into the rear seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■Forward facing Convertible seat
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it in
lock mode. In lock mode, the belt
cannot be extended.
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
127
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow
the shoulder belt to retract until
the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 128)
■Booster seat
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the
child restraint system according
to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is
correctly positioned over the
child's shoulder and that the lap
belt is as low as possible.
(P. 69)
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
128
1-7. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
Secure the child restraint using
the seat belt or LATCH anchors.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
STEP
1
STEP
2
129
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifica-
tions can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819.
CAUTION
■When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the
shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause
injury or discomfort to the child. (P. 71)
130
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●If the driver's seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the right-
hand rear seat.
●Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
●Only put a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoid-
able. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat, move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious
injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
131
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■When installing a child restraint system
●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's
shoulder. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
●Push and pull the child restraint system from side to side and forward to be
sure it is secure.
●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
■Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the
seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sud-
den braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may
cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerve or an accident.
132
1-7. Safety information
When driving 2
133
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle............ 134
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without a
smart key system).......... 145
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with a smart
key system).................... 148
Automatic transmission
(vehicles without
paddle shift switches) .... 155
Automatic transmission
(vehicles with paddle
shift switches) ................ 159
Turn signal lever .............. 166
Parking brake................... 167
Horn ................................. 168
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ......... 169
Indicators and warning
lights .............................. 179
2-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch............... 185
Fog light switch ................ 192
Windshield wipers and
washer ........................... 194
2-4. Using other driving
systems
Cruise control................... 199
Driving assist systems ..... 203
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor) ....... 208
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage .......... 213
Vehicle load limits ............ 217
Winter driving tips ............ 218
Trailer towing ................... 222
Dinghy towing .................. 223
134
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv-
ing:
■Starting the engine
P. 145, 148
■Driving
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 155, 159)
Release the parking brake. (P. 167)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■Stopping
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to P or N. (P. 155, 159)
■Parking the vehicle
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake. (P. 167)
Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 155, 159)
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Vehicles without a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the
engine.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the
engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
135
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Starting off on a steep uphill
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever
to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
■Driving in the rain
●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the
windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be
especially slippery.
●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road
surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.
This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation
to meet driving conditions. It dose not indicate sudden acceleration.
●The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
●When the accelerator pedal is released
■Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is rec-
ommended:
●For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
136
2-1. Driving procedures
■Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of
brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or when-
ever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota
dealer perform the bedding down operation.
■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (P. 468)
■Eco-friendly driving
During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco
driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light will
turn on. If the acceleration exceeds the
Zone of Eco driving, and when the vehicle
is stopped, the light turns off.
Eco Driving Indicator Light will not oper-
ate in the following conditions:
●The shift lever is anything other than D.
●The paddle shift switch is used. (If
equipped)
●The vehicle speed is approximately 80
mph (130 km/h) or higher.
Eco Driving Indicator Light can be acti-
vated or deactivated. (P. 176)
137
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine run-
ning. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-
erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident
that could result in death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-
culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and acceler-
ator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-
ing in an accident.
●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot
parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
●Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving posi-
tion, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering
performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
●If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and
check that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can
cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious
health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immedi-
ately.
●Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
138
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
●Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
●Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
●Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the
engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is
selected.
●During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off
while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 463
●Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (P. 156, 160)
●Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents,
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body
are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit per-
mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-
speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability
tires or not before driving at such speeds.
139
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
●Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in
engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
●After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in
an accident.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected
rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in
death or serious injury.
■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indica-
tors)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
140
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When the vehicle is stopped
●Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate
suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
●Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
●In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the
parking brake as necessary.
●If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
●Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
141
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When the vehicle is parked
●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi-
cle's electrical components.
●Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
●Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehi-
cle.
●Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine
and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
●Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
●Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead
to death or a serious health hazard.
142
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
●If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed
area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
●The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or
crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise,
be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in
death or a serious health hazard.
■When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever
or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to
engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly venti-
lated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
143
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When braking
●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause
one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the
parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
●If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.
●Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
●The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will
increase.
If this happens, do not continue to drive the vehicle. Have your brakes
fixed immediately.
NOTICE
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain driving torque.
●Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■When parking the vehicle
Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is acci-
dentally depressed.
144
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for
an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down and stop
the vehicle in a safe place.
●It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
●The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 435)
■When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
●Engine stalling
●Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:
●Brake function
●Changes in quantity and quality of engine oil, and transaxle fluid etc.
●Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possi-
ble), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
145
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a smart key system)
■Starting the engine
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position and start
the engine.
■Changing the engine switch positions
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked
and the key can be removed.
(The key can be removed only
when the shift lever is in “P”.)
“ACC”
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
“ON”
All electrical components can
be used.
“START”
For starting the engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
146
2-1. Driving procedures
■Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”
Shift the shift lever to P.
■If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 92)
■When the steering lock cannot be released
■Key reminder function
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position to remind you to remove the key.
STEP
1
Push in the key and turn it to the “LOCK”
position.
STEP
2
When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”
position. To free it, turn the key while turn-
ing the steering wheel slightly left and
right.
147
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an
emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the
engine switch only to the “ACC” position to stop the engine. An accident may
result if the engine is stopped while driving.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long periods
of time without the engine running.
■When starting the engine
●Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may
overheat the starter and wiring system.
●Do not race a cold engine.
●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
148
2-1. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a smart key system)
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic
key on your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START
STOP” switch modes.
■Starting the engine
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
If the shift lever is not set in P, the engine may not be started.
(P. 155, 159)
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
The smart key system indicator light (green) will turn on. If the
indicator light does not turn on, the engine cannot be started.
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 30 seconds,
whichever is less.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
The engine can be started
from any “ENGINE START
STOP” switch mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
150
2-1. Driving procedures
■Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch with brake pedal released. (The mode changes
each time the switch is pressed.)
Off*
The emergency flashers can
be used.
The smart key system indicator
light (green) off.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
The smart key system indicator
light (green) flashes slowly.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The smart key system indicator
light (green) flashes slowly.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off
the engine, the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will be
turned to ACCESSORY mode,
not to off.
151
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other
than P
If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P,
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will not be turned off but instead
be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to
turn the switch off:
Check that the parking brake is set.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Check that the smart key system indicator light (green)
flashes slowly and then press the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch once.
Check that the smart key system indicator light (green) is off.
■Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNI-
TION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the
shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn off.
However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not
leave the vehicle with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY
or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not run-
ning.
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 44
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 40
■Note for the entry function
P. 41
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
152
2-1. Driving procedures
■If the engine does not start
●The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 92)
■Steering lock
After turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off and opening and closing
the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function.
Operating the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again automatically cancels
the steering lock.
■When the steering lock cannot be released
■Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be sus-
pended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time.
In this case, refrain from operating the engine. After about 10 seconds, the
steering lock motor will resume functioning.
■When the smart key system indicator light flashes in yellow
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
■If the electronic key battery is depleted
P. 384
●Check that the shift lever is securely set
in P. The engine may not start if the shift
lever is displaced out of P.
The smart key system indicator light
(green) will flash quickly.
Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while
turning the steering wheel left and right.
153
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Operation of the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
When operating the “ENGINE START STOP” switch, one short, firm press is
enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the engine may not start or the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to
press and hold the switch.
■If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting
P. 452
CAUTION
■When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Caution while driving
If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the
doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the
steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death
or serious injury.
■Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 2 seconds,
or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession.
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving
except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause
loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will
be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull
over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
154
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
●Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running.
●If the smart key system indicator light (green) is illuminated, the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is not off. When exiting the vehicle, always check
that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.
●Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If
the engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY
mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, battery discharge may
occur.
■When starting the engine
●Do not race a cold engine.
●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
■Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch
If the “ENGINE START STOP” seems to be operating somewhat differently
than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
155
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Automatic transmission (vehicles without paddle shift switches)
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■Shifting the shift lever
Vehicles without a smart key system:
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the
shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal
depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the
vehicle is completely stopped.
156
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing shift ranges in S mode
When the shift lever is in the S position, the shift lever can be oper-
ated as follows:
Type A
Upshifting
Downshifting
■Shift position purpose
*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the
D position for normal driving.
*2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the
possible gear ranges, controls engine braking force, and prevents
unnecessary upshifting.
Shift position Function
PParking the vehicle/starting the engine
RReversing
NNeutral
DNormal driving*1
SS mode driving*2 (P. 156)
157
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Type B
Upshifting
Downshifting
The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to “5” or “4”
according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be
set to “3” if AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D
position. (P. 157)
■Shift ranges and their functions
●You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force.
●A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than
a higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.
■S mode
●When the shift range is “4” or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets
the shift range to “6”.
●To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically
occur.
●To protect the automatic transmission, a function is adopted that auto-
matically shifts to the top range when the temperature is too hot.
■AI-SHIFT
AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver perfor-
mance and driving conditions.
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.
(Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
158
2-1. Driving procedures
■When driving with cruise control activated
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling
engine braking, engine braking will not activate while driving in S mode and
downshifting to 5 or 4 because cruise control will not be canceled. (P. 199)
■If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 449
■If the “S” indicator does not come on or the “D” indicator is displayed
even after shifting the shift lever to S
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when
the shift lever is in D.)
■Downshift restriction warning buzzer (S mode)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may
sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be
possible even when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
CAUTION
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid,
resulting in an accident.
159
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Automatic transmission (vehicles with paddle shift switches)
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■Shifting the shift lever
Vehicles without a smart key system:
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the
shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal
depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the
vehicle is completely stopped.
160
2-1. Driving procedures
■Shift position purpose
*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the
D position for normal driving.
*2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the
possible gear ranges, controls engine braking force, and prevents
unnecessary upshifting.
Shift position Function
PParking the vehicle/starting the engine
RReversing
NNeutral
DNormal driving*1
SS mode driving*2 (P. 162)
161
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Shift position Meter display Function Purpose
Normal “D”
position driv-
ing
Gears
between “1”
and “6” are
automati-
cally
selected
according to
driving con-
ditions
(paddle shift
switches acti-
vated)
Shift range
selection
(P. 163)
Allows opti-
mum use of
engine brak-
ing
Shift range
selection
(P. 162)
Allows the
driver to
select gears
for sporty
driving
162
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing shift ranges in S mode
When the shift lever is in the S position, the shift lever or paddle shift
switches can be operated as follows:
Shift lever
Upshifting
Downshifting
Paddle shift switches
Upshifting
Downshifting
The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to “5” or “4”
according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be
set to “3” if AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D
position. (P. 157)
163
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Selecting shift ranges in the “D” position
To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-”paddle
shift switch. The shift range can then be selected by operating the “-”
and “+” paddle shift switches. Changing the shift range allows restric-
tion of the highest gear, preventing unnecessary upshifting and
enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The selected shift range, from “1”
to “5”, or “D” will be displayed in
the meter.
To return to normal “D” position
driving, the “+” paddle shift
switch must be held down for a
period of time.
When a shift range higher than
“5” is selected, the shift range
will return to the normal D posi-
tion.
■Shift ranges and their functions
●You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force.
●A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than
a higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.
164
2-1. Driving procedures
■S mode
●When the shift range is “4” or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets
the shift range to “6”.
●To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically
occur.
●To protect the automatic transmission, a function is adopted that auto-
matically shifts to the top range when the temperature is too hot.
■AI-SHIFT
AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver perfor-
mance and driving conditions.
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.
(Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
■When driving with cruise control activated
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling
engine braking, engine braking will not activate while driving in D or S mode
and downshifting to 5 or 4 because cruise control will not be canceled. (P.
199)
■If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 449
■If the “S” indicator does not come on or the “D” indicator is displayed
even after shifting the shift lever to S
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when
the shift lever is in D.)
■Downshift restriction warning buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may
sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be
possible even when the shift lever or paddle shift switches are operated. (A
buzzer will sound twice.)
165
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid,
resulting in an accident.
166
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
■Turn signals can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system: The engine switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
Vehicles with a smart key system: The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode.
■If the indicators flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.
The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions
of the driver:
Right turn
Left turn
Lane change to the right
(push and hold the lever
partway)
The right hand signals will
flash until you release the
lever.
Lane change to the left
(push and hold the lever
partway)
The left hand signals will flash
until you release the lever.
167
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Parking brake
■Usage in winter time
See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (P. 218)
NOTICE
■Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
To set the parking brake, fully
depress the parking brake
pedal with your left foot while
depressing the brake pedal
with your right foot.
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)
U.S.A. Canada
169
2
When driving
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
Type A
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Average fuel consumption meter
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.
Display change button
P. 172
Engine coolant temperature display/instrument panel light con-
trol display
Displays the engine coolant temperature and instrument panel light
control.
171
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Type B
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Average fuel consumption meter
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.
Current fuel consumption gauge (if equipped)
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
Display change button
P. 172
172
2-2. Instrument cluster
Changing the odometer/trip meter display
Pressing the button changes the
display as follows.
Odometer/trip meter/average fuel consumption display
P. 172
Engine coolant temperature display/instrument panel light con-
trol display
Displays the engine coolant temperature and instrument panel light
control.
Outside temperature display
P. 301
Shift position/shift range display
Displays the currently selected shift position and the shift range.
P. 155, 159
Instrument panel light control button
P. 175
173
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Type A
●Odometer
●Trip meters A and B
●Outside temperature
●Average fuel consumption
Displays the total distance the vehicle
has been driven.
Displays the distance the vehicle has
been driven since the meter was last
reset. Trip meters A and B can be used
to record and display different distances
independently.
Press and hold the button to reset.
Displays the outside air temperature.
The temperature range that can be dis-
played is from -40F (-40C) to 122F
(50C).
Displays the average fuel consumption
since the function was last reset.
• To reset the function, press and hold
the button while average fuel consump-
tion is being displayed.
The average fuel consumption meter
will also be reset, returning the needle
to the 0 position.
• Use the displayed average fuel con-
sumption as a reference.
174
2-2. Instrument cluster
●Current fuel consumption
Type B
●Odometer
●Trip meters A and B
●Average fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel con-
sumption
Displays the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
Displays the distance the vehicle has been
driven since the meter was last reset. Trip
meters A and B can be used to record and dis-
play different distances independently.
Press and hold the button to reset.
Displays the average fuel consumption since
the function was last reset.
• To reset the function, press and hold the but-
ton while average fuel consumption is being
displayed.
The average fuel consumption meter will also
be reset, returning the needle to the 0 posi-
tion.
• Use the displayed average fuel consumption
as a reference.
175
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Instrument panel light control button
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Type A
Pressing the button will adjust
brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
Type B
Pressing the button will adjust
brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
176
2-2. Instrument cluster
Eco Driving Indicator Light and current fuel consumption gauge
customization
Type A
Eco Driving Indicator Light can
be activated or deactivated
While the odometer is
being displayed, press
and hold the display
change button to display
the Eco Driving Indicator
Light customization
screen
Press the display change
button to set Eco Driving
Indicator Light to on or
off.
Press and hold the dis-
play change button to
complete the setting
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
177
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Type B
Eco Driving Indicator Light and
current fuel consumption gauge
can be activated or deactivated
While the odometer is
being displayed, press
and hold the display
change button to display
the Eco Driving Indicator
Light customization
screen
Press the display change
button to set Eco Driving
Indicator Light to on or
off.
Press and hold the dis-
play change button to
complete the setting
If off is selected, Eco Driving
Indicator Light and the current
fuel consumption gauge (if
equipped) will not be displayed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
■The meters and display illuminate when
Vehicles without a smart key system:
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
178
2-2. Instrument cluster
■The brightness of the instrument panel lights
When the tail lights are turned on, the meter’s brightness will be reduced
slightly unless the meter brightness level adjustment is set to the brightest
setting.
On some models: If the tail lights are turned on when the surroundings are
dark, the meter’s brightness will reduce slightly. However, when the sur-
roundings are bright, such as during the daytime, the meter’s brightness will
not be reduced even if the tail lights are turned on.
■Fuel gauge and odometer/trip meter display remain on mode
Vehicles without a smart key system:
After the engine switch has been turned off, the fuel gauge and odometer/
trip meter display remain on for 10 minutes, enabling the fuel gauge and
odometer/trip meter values to be checked again without having to turn the
engine switch to the “ON” position.
When confirming the gauges and meters, turn the headlight switch to the
position. Press the display change button to change between the
odometer and trip meter displays.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
After the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been turned off, the fuel gauge
and odometer/trip meter display remain on for 10 minutes, enabling the fuel
gauge and odometer/trip meter values to be checked again without having to
turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode.
When confirming the gauges and meters, turn the headlight switch to the
position. Press the display change button to change between the
odometer and trip meter displays.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the engine and its components
●Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
●The engine may be overheating if the rightmost segment of the engine
coolant temperature display is flashing. In this case, immediately stop the
vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled com-
pletely. (P. 459)
179
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster, center
panel and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of
the vehicle’s various systems.
■Instrument cluster
Type A
Type B
180
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Center panel
■Outside rear view mirrors (if equipped)
181
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the
vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 166)
(if equipped)
BSM outside rear view
mirror indicators
(P. 208)
Headlight high beam
indicator (P. 188) (U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator
(P. 185)
Slip indicator
(P. 203) (Canada)
Tail light indicator
(P. 185)
VSC OFF indicator
(P. 204) (if equipped)
Front fog light indicator
(P. 192)
“TRAC OFF” indicator
(P. 204)
SRS airbag on-off indi-
cator (P. 113)
Security indicator
(P. 92, 95)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 199)
Type A
Cruise control set indi-
cator (P. 199)
Type B
Eco Driving Indicator
Light (P. 136)
(If equipped)
Smart key system indi-
cator (P. 148)
*2
*1, 3
*1
*1
*1
Shift position and
shift range indica-
tors (P. 155)
Shift position and
shift range indica-
tors (P. 155, 159)
*1
182
2-2. Instrument cluster
*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position (vehicles without a smart key system) or the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles
with a smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being
performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a
few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does
not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*2: In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indi-
cators illuminate in the following situations:
• When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode while the BSM main switch is set to ON.
• When the BSM main switch is set to ON while the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mir-
ror indicators will turn off after a few seconds.
If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do
not turn off, there may be a malfunction with the system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*3: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
183
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the
vehicle’s systems. (P. 420)
*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position (vehicles without a smart key system) or the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles
with a smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being
performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a
few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does
not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
(U.S.A.) (Canada) (U.S.A.) (Canada) (U.S.A.)
(Canada) (U.S.A.) (if equipped) (if equipped)
(if equipped)
Type A Type B
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*3
*1
*1
*1
*4
*1
*2
184
2-2. Instrument cluster
CAUTION
■If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS or SRS warning light not come
on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not
available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or
serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately
if this occurs.
*2: In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indi-
cators illuminate in the following situations:
• When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode while the BSM main switch is set to ON.
• When the BSM main switch is set to ON while the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mir-
ror indicators will turn off after a few seconds.
If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do
not turn off, there may be a malfunction with the system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*3: The light comes on in yellow to indicate a malfunction.
*4: The light flashes in yellow to indicate a malfunction. The light
flashes quickly in green to indicate that the steering lock has not
been released.
185
2
When driving
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
U.S.A. (type A)
The daytime running
lights turn on.
The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate,
daytime running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
the lights listed above
(except daytime run-
ning lights) turn on.
The daytime running
light turns off.
DRL
186
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
U.S.A. (type B)
Vehicles without a
smart key system: The
headlights and parking
lights, daytime running
lights turn on and off
automatically (when the
engine switch is in the
“ON” position).
Vehicles with a smart
key system: The head-
lights, parking lights,
daytime running lights
and so on turn on and
off automatically (when
the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode).
The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate,
daytime running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
the lights listed above
(except daytime run-
ning lights) turn on.
The daytime running
lights turn off.
187
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
Canada
Vehicles without a
smart key system: The
headlights, parking
lights, daytime running
lights and so on turn on
and off automatically
(when the engine
switch is in the “ON”
position).
Vehicles with a smart
key system: The head-
lights, parking lights,
daytime running lights
and so on turn on and
off automatically (when
the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode).
The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate,
daytime running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
the lights listed above
(except daytime run-
ning lights) turn on.
The daytime running
lights turn on.
188
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push
the lever away from you to
turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.
Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams
with the headlights on or off.
Manual headlight leveling dial (if equipped)
The level of the headlights can be adjusted according to the number
of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle.
Raises the level of the head-
lights
Lowers the level of the head-
lights
189
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
■Guide to dial settings
■Daytime running light system
●To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on
automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and
the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for
use at night.
U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.
●Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system
offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help
improve fuel economy.
■Headlight control sensor (if equipped)
Occupancy and luggage load conditions Dial position
Occupants Luggage load
Driver None 0
Driver and front pas-
senger None 0
All seats occupied None 1
All seats occupied Full luggage loading 3
Driver Full luggage loading 4.5
The sensor may not function properly if
an object is placed on the sensor, or any-
thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to
the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the automatic headlight sys-
tem to malfunction.
190
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■Automatic light off system (if equipped)
Vehicles without a smart key system
●When the light switch is in : The headlights and tail lights turn off
30 seconds after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”
position and a door is opened and closed. (Vehicles with a wireless
remote control: The lights turn off immediately if on the key is
pressed twice after all the doors are closed.)
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to “ON” position, or turn
the light switch off once and then back to or .
If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off
after 20 minutes.
Vehicles with a smart key system
●When the light switch is in : The headlights and tail lights turn off
30 seconds after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to
ACCESSORY mode or turned off and a door is opened and closed. (The
lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed twice after all
the doors are closed.)
To turn the lights on again, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to
or .
If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off
after 20 minutes.
■Light reminder buzzer
Vehicles without a smart key system
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned “OFF” or to “ACC” posi-
tion and the driver's door is opened with the key removed from the engine
switch while the lights are turned on.
Vehicles with a smart key system
A buzzer sounds when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off or
turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the
lights are turned on.
191
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
■Battery-saving function
In order to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging, if the headlights
and/or tail lights are on when the engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” posi-
tion (vehicles without a smart key system) or when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned off (vehicles with a smart key system) the battery
saving function will operate and automatically turn off all the lights after
approximately 20 minutes.
When the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a
smart key system) or when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system), the battery-saving
function will be disabled.
When any of the following are performed, the battery-saving function is can-
celed once and then reactivated. All the lights will turn off automatically 20
minutes after the battery-saving function has been reactivated:
●When the headlight switch is operated
●When a door is opened or closed
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 493)
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not run-
ning.
192
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Fog light switch
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving condi-
tions, such as in rain and fog.
U.S.A.
Turns the front fog lights off
Turns the front fog lights on
: If equipped
193
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
■Fog lights can be used when
The headlights are on in low beam.
Canada
Turns the front fog lights off
Turns the front fog lights on
194
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as fol-
lows.
U.S.A. (type A)
Intermittent windshield
wiper operation
Low speed windshield wiper
operation
High speed windshield
wiper operation
Temporary operation
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
195
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
When is selected, the wiper interval can be adjusted
for intermittent operation.
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.
U.S.A. (type B)
Intermittent windshield
wiper operation
Low speed windshield wiper
operation
High speed windshield
wiper operation
Temporary operation
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
196
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
When is selected, the wiper interval can be adjusted for
intermittent operation.
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.
Canada
Intermittent windshield
wiper operation
Low speed windshield wiper
operation
High speed windshield
wiper operation
Temporary operation
197
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
■The windshield wiper and washers can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system: The engine switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
Vehicles with a smart key system: The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode.
■If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
198
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
NOTICE
■When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-
heat.
■When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
199
2
When driving
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
Indicators
Cruise control switch
■Setting the vehicle speed
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to
deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
200
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the
lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased con-
tinually until the lever is released.
■Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when the brakes are
applied.
Pushing the lever up
resumes the constant
speed control.
Resuming is available when
the vehicle speed is more
than approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h).
201
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Cruise control can be set when
●The shift lever is in the D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
●Range 4 or higher has been selected by using the paddle shift.
(vehicles with paddle shift switch)
●Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
●The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set
speed resumes.
●Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be
increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then
pushing the lever down to set the new speed.
■Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations.
●Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)
below the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●VSC is activated.
■If the cruise control indicator light comes on in yellow
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press
the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels
immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise
control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
202
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
203
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Driving assist systems
When the TRAC/VSC systems are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slip-
ping or if any of the drive wheels
spins, the slip indicator light
flashes to indicate that the VSC/
TRAC systems are operating.
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-
tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and
should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.
■Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation.
■VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces.
■TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spin-
ning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
■EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel.
■BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if equipped)
P. 208
204
2-4. Using other driving systems
Disabling the TRAC/VSC systems
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRAC/VSC sys-
tems may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may
need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order
to free it.
■Turning off the TRAC system only
Quickly push and release the
switch to turn off TRAC.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light
should come on.
Press the switch again to turn the
system back on.
■Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems
Push and hold the switch for
more than 3 seconds while the
vehicle is stopped to turn off
TRAC and VSC.
The “TRAC OFF” and VSC OFF
indicator lights should come on.
Press the switch again to turn the
systems back on.
205
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■When the “TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on even if the VSC OFF
switch has not been pressed
TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and
TRAC
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indi-
cate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may
be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■Reactivation of the TRAC /VSC systems after turning off the engine
Turning off the engine after turning off the TRAC/VSC systems will automati-
cally reactivate them.
■Reactivation of the TRAC system linked to vehicle speed
When only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on
when vehicle speed increases. However, when both TRAC and VSC sys-
tems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed
increases.
■Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from
overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of
time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur,
refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine
off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.
■If the slip indicator comes on...
It may indicate a malfunction in the TRAC and VSC. Contact your Toyota
dealer.
206
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ABS does not operate effectively when
●Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn
tires on a snow covered road).
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick
road.
■Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of nor-
mal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situ-
ations:
●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
●When driving with tire chains
●When driving over bumps in the road
●When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven surfaces
■TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
207
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may
cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
■When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-
tions. As these are the systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force,
do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.
■Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and
total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the
recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires
are installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.
208
2-4. Using other driving systems
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
: If equipped
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that assists the driver in making
the decision to change lanes.
The system uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling
in an adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear
view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicles
existence via the outside rear view mirror indicator.
BSM main switch
Pressing the switch turns the system on or off. When the switch is set
to on, the switch’s indicator illuminates.
Outside rear view mirror indicator
When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mir-
ror indicator on that side illuminates. If the turn signal lever is operated
when a vehicle is in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator
flashes.
209
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas
The blind spot that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of the detection area
extends to:
Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m)
from the side of the vehicle
The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the
side of the vehicle is not in the
detection area
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m)
from the rear bumper
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) for-
ward of the rear bumper
■The Blind Spot Monitor is operational when
The BSM main switch is set to on and vehicle speed is greater than about 25
mph (40 km/h)
■The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle when
●A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle
●Another vehicle enters the vehicles detection area when it changes
lanes.
210
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor will not detect a vehicle
The Blind Spot Monitor is not designed to detect the following types of vehi-
cles and/or objects:
●Vehicles traveling from the opposite direction
●Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.*
●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
●Following vehicles that are in the same lane*
●Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle*
*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur
■Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor may not function cor-
rectly
●The Blind Spot Monitor may not detect vehicles correctly in the following
conditions:
• During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.
• When ice, mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water
etc.
• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle
and the vehicle that enters the detection area
• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the
detection area as your vehicle accelerates
• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a
dip in the road etc.
• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each
vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far
away from your vehicle
• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about
the same speed as your vehicle
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle
and the vehicle that enters the detection area.
• Directly after the BSM switch is set to on.
211
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
●Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor unnecessarily detecting a vehicle
and/or object may increase under the following conditions:
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guard-
rail, wall etc.
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a follow-
ing vehicle.
• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across
from your vehicle enters the detection area
■The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility
When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be
difficult to see.
■When there is a malfunction in the system
If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons,
warning lights will turn on: (P. 421)
●There is a malfunction with the sensors
●The sensors have become dirty
●The outside temperature is extremely high or low
●The sensor voltage has become abnormal
■Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor
FCC ID: OAYBSDTX
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following three conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
(3) This device may only work when the vehicle is in operation pursuant to
§ 15.252 (a) (4).
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
212
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor is a supplementary system which alerts the driver
that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot
Monitor. The system cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over
reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Accord-
ing to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the
driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.
■Handling the radar sensor
One Blind Spot Monitor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle
rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot
Monitor can function correctly.
●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong
impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may mal-
function and vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If
the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have
the area inspected by your Toyota dealer.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on
the bumper.
●Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
●Do not paint the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
●Keep the sensor and its surrounding
area on the bumper clean at all times.
213
2
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
(1)Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's
placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 150) =
650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Take notice of the following information about storage precau-
tions, cargo capacity and load:
●Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
●Be sure all items are secured in place.
●To maintain vehicle balance while driving, position luggage
evenly within the luggage compartment.
●For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
214
2-5. Driving information
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
(P. 466)
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.
Example based on your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are
riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 905 lb. (410
kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be
as follows:
905 lb. - 366 lb. = 539 lb. (410 kg -166 kg = 244 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of
388 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be
reduced as follows:
539 lb. - 388 lb. = 151 lb. (244 kg - 176 kg = 68 kg)
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount
that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In
other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus
cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.
215
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Things that must not be carried in the trunk
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:
●Receptacles containing gasoline
●Aerosol cans
■Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
●To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do
not stack anything in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low,
as close to the floor as possible.
●When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed
directly behind the front seats.
●Never allow anyone to ride in the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for
passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts prop-
erly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or
serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving
or an accident.
●Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the
item may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the
pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit
the driver or passengers, causing an accident:
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the package tray
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
●Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and
injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an acci-
dent.
216
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■Capacity and distribution
●Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle
weight rating.
●Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less
than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly.
Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking con-
trol which may cause death or serious injury.
217
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Vehicle load limits
■Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information
label. (P. 375)
CAUTION
■Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and
braking ability, resulting in an accident.
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,
towing capacity and cargo capacity.
■Total load capacity: 905 lb. (410 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.
■Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
■Towing capacity
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
■Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
218
2-5. Driving information
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropri-
ate to the prevailing weather conditions.
■Pre-winter preparations
●Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem-
peratures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
●Have a service technician inspect the level and specific grav-
ity of battery electrolyte.
●Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set
of tire chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains
match the size of the tires.
■Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
●Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is
frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.
Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents
in front of the windshield.
●Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
●Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow
that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the
brakes.
219
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Selecting tire chains
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain:
0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
0.39 in. (10 mm) in width
1.18 in. (30 mm) in length
Cross chain:
0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter
0.55 in. (14 mm) in width
0.98 in. (25 mm) in length
Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to loca-
tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
■When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suit-
able to road conditions.
■When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it
from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent
inadvertent sliding or creeping.
220
2-5. Driving information
■Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
●Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
●Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the
rear tires.
●Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains
after driving 1/4 1/2 mile (0.5 1.0 km).
●Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
CAUTION
■Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
●Use tires of the size specified.
●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
●Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of
snow tires being used.
●Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
●Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
●Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect
vehicle handling.
●Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-
trol is maintained.
221
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legiti-
mate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the opera-
tion of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.
222
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or
the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc.
Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow
hitch mounted carriers.
223
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Dinghy towing
NOTICE
■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on
the ground) behind a motor home.
224
2-5. Driving information
Interior features 3
225
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Manual air conditioning
system ........................... 226
Automatic air
conditioning system ....... 233
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers ............ 240
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types.......... 242
Using the radio................. 248
Using the CD player......... 251
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs..................... 257
Operating an iPod............ 264
Operating a USB
memory.......................... 272
Optimal use of the audio
system ........................... 280
Using the AUX port .......... 283
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list............... 285
• Interior lights .................. 286
• Personal lights ............... 287
3-4. Using the storage
features
List of storage features .... 289
• Glove box....................... 290
• Console box................... 291
• Coin holder .................... 292
• Bottle holders................. 293
• Cup holders ................... 294
• Auxiliary boxes............... 296
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors ........................ 298
Vanity mirrors................... 299
Clock................................ 300
Outside temperature
display............................ 301
Ashtray............................. 303
Power outlets ................... 304
Seat heaters..................... 307
Armrest ............................ 309
Coat hooks....................... 310
Floor mat.......................... 311
Trunk features.................. 313
Garage door opener......... 315
Compass.......................... 322
Safety Connect ................ 326
226
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Manual air conditioning system
: If equipped
Fan speed control dial
Air outlet selection button
Air intake mode button Cooling and dehumidification
function on/off button
Temperature control dial
Windshield defogger
227
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Adjusting the settings
To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial clock-
wise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).
Turning the dial to “OFF” turns off the fan.
To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control
dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).
If is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature
air or heated air.
For quick cooling, turn the temperature control dial to “MAX A/C”.
The air conditioning will automatically turn on. The air intake mode
button will be set for recirculated air mode when or is
selected. It is not possible to turn to the outside air mode.
To change the air outlets, press , , or
.
Defogging the windshield
Press .
If the recirculated air mode is
used, it will automatically switch
to the outside air mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
228
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Perform the following operations accordingly:
●To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial.
●To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature con-
trol dial.
●If the dehumidification function is not operating, press
to operate the dehumidification function.
To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the
air flow and temperature up.
Air outlets and air flow
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
STEP
2
229
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Air flows to the feet.
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode.
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (introduces air from out-
side the vehicle) (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (recycles air
inside the vehicle) (indicator on) each time the button is pressed.
230
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
231
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to
in accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.
■Fogging up of the windows
●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the
windshield effectively.
●If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.
●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■Outside/recirculated air mode
When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the out-
side/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effec-
tive in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling
operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior
effectively.
■When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when is
pressed.
■Air conditioning odors
●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
■Air conditioning filter
P. 382
232
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
CAUTION
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the
windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking
your vision.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
233
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Automatic air conditioning system
: If equipped
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
Cooling and dehumidification
function on/off button
Front passenger’s side
temperature setting display
Driver’s side
temperature control
“DUAL” button
Automatic
mode
Off
Driver’s side temperature
setting display
Fan speed
Outside air or recirculated air mode
Fan speed
display
Change the air outlets used
Front passenger’s side
temperature control
Windshield defogger
Air outlet display
234
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using the automatic air conditioning system
Press .
The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and
fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temper-
ature setting.
Turn clockwise to increase the temperature and turn
counterclockwise to decrease the temperature.
When is pressed (the indicator is on) or the passen-
ger’s side temperature control dial is turned, the temperature for the
driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.
Adjusting the settings manually
To adjust the fan speed, press “>” on to increase the
fan speed and “<” to decrease the fan speed.
Press to turn the fan off.
To adjust the temperature setting, turn clockwise to
increase the temperature and turn counterclockwise to
decrease the temperature.
When is pressed (the indicator is on) or the passen-
ger’s side temperature control dial is turned, the temperature for the
driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.
To change the air outlets, press “<” or “>” on .
The air outlets used are switched each time either side of the button
is pressed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
235
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Defogging the windshield
Press .
The dehumidification function
operates and fan speed
increases.
Set the outside/recirculated air
mode button to the outside air
mode if the recirculated air mode
is used. (It may switch automati-
cally.)
To defog the windshield and the
side windows early, turn the air
flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode,
press again when the
windshield is defogged.
Air outlets and air flow
Air flows to the upper body.
236
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
*: When the warming function is
operating, air flows to the
upper body as well to warm the
upper body effectively.
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (the indicator is off) and
recirculated air mode (the indicator is on) each time the button is
pressed.
*
*
237
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Rear outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
238
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting
and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow
immediately after is pressed.
■Fogging up of the windows
●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the
windshield effectively.
●If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.
●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■Outside/recirculated air mode
●When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the
outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is
effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. Dur-
ing cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the
vehicle interior effectively.
●Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on
the temperature setting or the inside temperature.
■When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32F (0C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when is
pressed.
239
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■Air conditioning odors
●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic
mode.
■Air conditioning filter
P. 382
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. air conditioning setting) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 493)
CAUTION
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the
windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking
your vision.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
240
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
■The defoggers can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■The outside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped)
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror
defoggers on.
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system
Turns the defoggers on/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after their opera-
tion time. The operation time is
between 15 minutes and 1
hour depending on the ambient
temperature and vehicle
speed.
Vehicles without outside rear view mirror defoggers
Vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers
Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system
Turns the defoggers on/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after their opera-
tion time. The operation time is
between 15 minutes and 1
hour depending on the ambient
temperature and vehicle
speed.
A
B
241
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on (if equipped)
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can
become very hot and burn you.
242
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types
Without navigation system and Display Audio system
CD player and AM/FM radio
Title Page
Using the radio P. 248
Using the CD player P. 251
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 257
Operating an iPod P. 264
Operating a USB memory P. 272
Optimal use of the audio system P. 280
Using the AUX port P. 283
243
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
With Display Audio system
Owners of models equipped with a Display Audio system should
refer to the “Display Audio System Owner's Manual”.
Display Audio system
Premium Display Audio system
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer
to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
A
B
244
3-2. Using the audio system
■About Bluetooth® (with Display Audio system)
The Bluetooth wordmark and logo are owned by Bluetooth SIG. and permis-
sion has been granted to use the trademark of the licensee Panasonic Cor-
poration/Pioneer Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names are
owned by various different owners.
CAUTION
■Certifications for the Bluetooth (with Display Audio system)
FCC ID: ACJ932CQ-US70G0
IC ID: 216J-CQUS70G0
FCC ID: AJDK032
IC ID: 775E-K032
●FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
●Part 15 of the FCC Rules & Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s)
• Properly shielded a grounded cables and connectors must be used for
connection to host computer and/or peripherals in order to meet FCC
emission limits.
• This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with
any other antenna or transmitter.
• This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of this device.
• Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC
et CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1)
l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de
l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
245
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
• This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set
forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio fre-
quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equip-
ment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without
maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable
that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20
cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands,
wrists, feet and ankles).
• Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux
rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et
respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes
directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et d’exposition
aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet
équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée
conforme sans évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une
distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à
l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
• Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only
operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain
approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential
radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should
be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is
not more than that necessary for successful communication.
• Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent
émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un
gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie
Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage
radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type
d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée
équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à
l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.
246
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
●Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information
from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so
that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disas-
semble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to
laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation expo-
sure.
THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL
INCREASE EYE HAZARD.
247
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is
stopped.
■To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
248
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the radio
Setting station presets
Search for a desired station by turning or pressing
or .
Press and hold a button (from to ) until you hear
a beep.
Volume Preset station selector
Seeking the
frequency
Adjusting the
frequency
AM/FM mode button
Power
Displaying
radio text
messages
Scanning for
receivable stations
STEP
1
STEP
2
249
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Scanning radio stations
■Scanning the preset radio stations
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press once
again.
■Scanning all radio stations within range
Press .
All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press once
again.
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Frequency Channel name Radio text.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
250
3-2. Using the audio system
■Reception sensitivity
●Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the con-
tinually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength
and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
●The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear
radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic
objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
■Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. How-
ever, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of
the following:
●Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.
●Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
●Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
251
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the CD player
Loading CDs
Insert a CD.
Ejecting CDs
Press and remove the CD.
Selecting a track
Turn or press to move up or to move down until
the desired track number is displayed.
Volume
Random
playback
Selecting a track, fast-forwarding or reversing
Repeat play
Power
CD eject
Selecting a track/
displaying track list
Back button
Displaying
text
messages
Searching playback
Playback/pause
252
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a track from a track list
Press .
The track list will be displayed.
Turn and press to select a track.
To return to the previous display, press ( ).
Scanning tracks
Press .
The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.
To cancel, press again.
Press again when the desired track is reached.
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
Press and hold or .
Repeat play
Press (RPT).
The current track is played repeatedly until (RPT) is pressed
again.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
253
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Random playback
Press (RDM).
Tracks are played in a random order until (RDM) is pressed again.
Playing and pausing tracks
Press ( ).
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Track no./Elapsed time CD title Track title Artist name.
■Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding for 1 sec-
ond or more will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed for
6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed
properly or may not be displayed at all.
254
3-2. Using the audio system
■Error messages
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.
“CD CHECK”: The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the
player. Contact your Toyota dealer if the CD still cannot be
played.
■Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-
tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protect features may not be used.
■CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when
a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■If a CD is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
The CD may be damaged and may not play properly.
■Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
255
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs or 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual
Disc.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
●CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7
in. (12 cm)
●Low-quality and deformed CDs
●CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
●CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-
R labels attached to them, or that have
had the label peeled off
256
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the
CDs or the player itself.
●Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
●Do not apply oil to the CD player.
●Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
●Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
257
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 251
Selecting and scanning a folder
■Selecting a folder
Press or to select the desired folder.
■Returning to the first file of the first folder
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
Volume
Random
playback
Selecting a file, fast-forwarding or reversing
Repeat play
Power
CD eject
Selecting a file/
displaying folder lists
Back button
Selecting a folder
Displaying
text
messages
Searching
playback
Playback/pause
258
3-2. Using the audio system
■Scanning the first file of all the folders
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press again.
■Selecting a folder and file from folder lists
Press .
The folder list will be displayed.
Turn and press to select a folder and a file.
To return to the previous display, press ( ).
Selecting and scanning files
■Selecting a file
Turn or press or to select the desired file.
■Scanning the files in a folder
Press .
The first 10 seconds of each file will be played.
When the desired file is reached, press again.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
259
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
Press and hold or .
Repeat play
Pressing (RPT) changes modes in the following order:
File repeat Folder repeat* Off.
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected
Random playback
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Folder random Disc random Off.
Playing and pausing files
Press ( ).
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Track no./Elapsed time Folder name File name Album title (MP3
only) Track title Artist name.
260
3-2. Using the audio system
■Display
P. 253
■Canceling random and repeat playback
Press (RPT) or (RDM), or press and hold .
■Error messages
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the
player.
“CD CHECK”: The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside
the player. Contact your Toyota dealer if the CD still cannot
be played.
“NO SUPPORT”: This indicates that MP3/WMA files are not included in the
CD.
■Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-
tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
■CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when
a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■If a CD is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
The CD may be damaged and may not play properly.
261
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
■MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats
recorded by them that can be used.
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224,
256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128,
144, 160 (kbps)
* Compatible with VBR
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
* Only compatible with 2-channel playback
262
3-2. Using the audio system
●Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-
RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status
of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may
jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
●Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play
discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can
be played.
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
263
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
●MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc
are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file
is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you
do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnec-
essary folders.
If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data,
only music data can be played.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage
to the speakers.
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,
depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may
take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may
not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trade-
marks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
NOTICE
■CDs and adapters that cannot be used (P. 255)
■CD player precautions (P. 256)
264
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
■Connecting an iPod
Push the lid.
Open the cover and connect
an iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if
it is not turned on.
Press repeatedly until “iPod” is displayed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
265
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting a play mode
Press (BROWSE) to select iPod menu mode.
Turning clockwise changes the play mode in the fol-
lowing order:
“Playlists”“Artists”“Albums”“Songs”“Podcasts”“Genres”
“Composers”“Audiobooks”
Press to select the desired play mode.
Press (PLAY) to enter the displayed selection.
■Control panel
Selecting a song, fast-forwarding or reversing
Power Volume
Shuffle playback
Repeat play
iPod menu/selecting a
song/displaying lists
iPod menu mode/back button
Displaying
text
messages
Playback/pause
Play button
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
266
3-2. Using the audio system
■Play mode list
■Selecting a list
Turn to display the first selection list.
Press to select the desired item.
Pressing the knob changes to the second selection list.
Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.
To return to the previous selection list, press ( ).
Play mode First
selection
Second
selection
Third
selection
Fourth
selection
“Playlists”
Playlists
select
Songs
select --
“Artists” Artists select Albums
select
Songs
select -
“Albums” Albums
select
Songs
select --
“Songs” Songs select - - -
“Podcasts” Podcasts
select
Episodes
select --
“Genres” Genre select Artists select Albums
select
Songs
select
“Composers”
Composers
select
Albums
select
Songs
select -
“Audiobooks”
Audiobooks
select
Chapter
select --
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
267
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting songs
Turn or press or to select the desired song.
Selecting a song from the song list
Press .
The song list will be displayed.
Turn to select a song.
Press to play the song.
To return to the previous display, press ( ).
Fast-forwarding and reversing songs
Press and hold or .
Repeat play
Press
(RPT).
To cancel, press (RPT) again.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
268
3-2. Using the audio system
Shuffle playback
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Track shuffle Album shuffle Off.
Playing and pausing songs
Press ( ).
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Track no./Elapsed time Album name Track title Artist name.
■About iPod
●“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic acces-
sory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone,
respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple per-
formance standards.
269
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
●Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this
accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
●iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
■iPod functions
●When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod
mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last
used.
●Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as
opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and recon-
necting it once again may resolve the problem.
●While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own
controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system
instead.
●When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If
so, charge the iPod before use.
●Supported models (P. 270)
■iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect
your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Man-
ual.
■Display
P. 253
270
3-2. Using the audio system
■Error messages
“ERROR 1”: This indicates that the data in the iPod cannot be read.
“ERROR 3”: This indicates that the iPod may be malfunctioning.
“ERROR 4”: This indicates that an over current error has occurred.
“ERROR 5”: This indicates that an iPod communication error has
occurred.
“ERROR 6”: This indicates that an authentication error has occurred.
“NO SONGS”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“NO PLAYLISTS”: This indicates that some available songs are not found in
a selected playlist.
“UPDATE”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compati-
ble. Upgrade your iPod software to the latest version.
■Compatible models
The following iPod, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone
devices can be used with this system.
●Made for
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone
271
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some
models might be incompatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
●Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
●Maximum number of songs in device: 65535
●Maximum number of songs per list: 65535
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■If the auxiliary box lid cannot be fully closed
Depending on the size and shape of the iPod that is connected to the sys-
tem, the auxiliary box lid may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly
close the lid as this may damage the iPod or the terminal, etc.
■To prevent damage to iPod
●Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is
connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or
its terminal.
272
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the
vehicle speakers.
■Connecting a USB memory
Push the lid.
Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.
Press repeatedly until “USB” is displayed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
273
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting and scanning a folder
■Selecting a folder
Press or to select the desired folder.
■Returning to the first file of the first folder
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
■Control panel
Selecting a file/
displaying folder lists
Repeat play
Selecting a file, fast-forwarding or reversing
Power Volume
Back button
Selecting a folder
Random
playback
Displaying
text
messages
Searching
playback
Playback/pause
274
3-2. Using the audio system
■Scanning the first file of all the folders
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press again.
■Selecting from folder lists and file lists
Press .
The folder list will be displayed.
Turn and press to select a folder and a file.
To return to the previous display, press ( ).
Selecting and scanning files
■Selecting a file
Turn or press or to select the desired file.
■Scanning the files in a folder
Press .
The first 10 seconds of each file will be played.
When the desired file is reached, press again.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
275
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
Press and hold or .
Repeat play
Pressing (RPT) changes modes in the following order:
File repeat Folder repeat* Off.
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected
Random playback
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
1 folder random All folders random Off.
Playing and pausing files
Press ( ).
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Track no./Elapsed time Folder name File name Album title (MP3
only) Track title Artist name.
276
3-2. Using the audio system
■USB memory functions
●Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the
device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be avail-
able. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a mal-
function (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device
and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.
●If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being discon-
nected and reconnected, format the memory.
■Display
P. 253
■Error messages
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB
memory.
■USB memory
●Compatible devices
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback
●Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 Mbps)
• File formats: FAT12/16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be
displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
277
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
●MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and
to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII, MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 8-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, CBR)
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
278
3-2. Using the audio system
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3
tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
●MP3 and WMA playback
• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in
the USB memory are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first
MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly,
we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or
WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
• When the USB memory is connected and the audio source is changed
to USB memory mode, the USB memory will start playing the first file in
the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the
contents have not been changed), the USB memory will resume play
from the same point in which it was last used.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be skipped (not played).
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls.
279
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■If the auxiliary box lid cannot be fully closed
Depending on the size and shape of the USB memory that is connected to
the system, the auxiliary box lid may not close fully. In this case, do not forc-
ibly close the lid as this may damage the USB memory or the terminal, etc.
■To prevent damage to USB memory
●Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehi-
cle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory
while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB
memory or its terminal.
280
3-2. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Using the audio control function
■Changing sound quality modes
Press .
Turn to select “SOUND”.
Press .
Turn to select the desired mode.
“BAS”,“TRE”,“FAD”,“BAL”, or“ASL”
Press .
Displays the current mode
Changes the following set-
ting
• Sound quality and volume
balance (P. 281)
The sound quality and bal-
ance setting can be changed
to produce the best sound.
• Automatic Sound Levelizer
(P. 281)
Selecting the mode
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
281
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Adjusting sound quality
Turning adjusts the level.
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.
■Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
When ASL is selected, turn to select the desired mode.
Once the desired mode has been selected, press .
“ASL LOW”, “ASL MID”, “ASL HIGH”, or “ASL OFF”
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehi-
cle speed.
Sound qual-
ity mode
Mode
displayed Level Turn to the
left
Turn to the
right
Bass* “BAS” -5 to 5 Low High
Treble* “TRE” -5 to 5
Front/rear
volume
balance
“FAD” F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to front
Left/right
volume
balance
“BAL” L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right
282
3-2. Using the audio system
■Trademark owned by SRS Labs, Inc.
The audio systems utilize SRS FOCUS® and SRS TruBass® audio
enhancement technologies, under license from SRS Labs, Inc., in all modes
except AM radio mode.
FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs,
Inc.
FOCUS and TruBass technologies are incorporated under license from
SRS Labs, Inc.
TruBass® enhances the perception of bass frequencies to provide deep, rich
bass response from any size speaker.
SRS FOCUS® raises the audio image from non-optimally placed speakers
up to the natural listening height at ear level.
283
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the AUX port
■Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio device.
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen
to it through the vehicle’s speakers.
Push the lid.
Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.
Press repeatedly until “AUX” is displayed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
284
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■If the auxiliary box lid cannot be fully closed
Depending on the size and shape of the portable audio device that is con-
nected to the system, the auxiliary box lid may not close fully. In this case, do
not forcibly close the lid as this may damage the portable audio device or the
terminal, etc.
285
3
Interior features
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Interior/rear personal lights (vehicles with moon roof)
(P. 286, 287)
Interior light (vehicles without moon roof) (P. 286)
Interior/front personal lights (vehicles with moon roof) or per-
sonal lights (vehicles without moon roof) (P. 286, 287)
Shift lever light (when the tail lights are on) (vehicles with moon
roof)
Engine switch light (vehicles without a smart key system)/
“ENGINE START STOP” switch light (vehicles with a smart key
system)
Door courtesy lights
286
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights
Vehicles without moon roof
Turns the lights on
Turns the door position on
Turns the lights off
Vehicles with moon roof
Turns the lights on/off linked to
door positions.
Turns the lights on/off
Interior lights
287
3-3. Using the interior lights
3
Interior features
Personal lights
Front
Turns the lights on/off
Rear (vehicles with moon roof)
Turns the lights on/off
Personal lights
288
3-3. Using the interior lights
■Illuminated entry system
Vehicles without a smart key system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position,
whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/
closed.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to “ENGINE START STOP”
switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are
locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed.
■To prevent battery discharge
Vehicles without a smart key system
If the interior lights, personal lights and/or door courtesy lights are left on
when the engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position, the lights will go off
automatically after 20 minutes.
Vehicles with a smart key system
If the interior lights, personal lights and/or door courtesy lights are left on
when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off, the lights will go off
automatically after 20 minutes.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 493)
Personal lights
289
3
Interior features
3-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features
CAUTION
■Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
●Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
●Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
Auxiliary boxes
Glove box
Bottle holders/door pockets
Cup holders
Console box
Coin holder
290
3-4. Using the storage features
Glove box
The glove box can be opened by pressing the lock release button,
locked and unlocked using the master key (vehicles without a smart
key system) or the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart key sys-
tem).
Open
Lock
Unlock
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerv-
ing, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open
glove box or the items stored inside.
Glove box
291
3-4. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Console box
Lift the lid while pulling up the
lever to release the lock.
■When using the console box lid as an armrest
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident
may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open console box or the
items stored inside.
Slide the console box lid forward as
needed. Slide the lid forward while pulling
up the lever.
The lid can also be opened from the for-
wardmost position.
Console box
292
3-4. Using the storage features
Coin holder
Pull the lid down while pressing
down the button.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the coin holder closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident
may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open coin holder or the
items stored inside.
Coin holder
293
3-4. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Bottle holders
Front
Rear
■When using the holder as a bottle holder
●When storing a bottle, close the cap.
●The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury.
Bottle holders
294
3-4. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Front
Rear
Pull the armrest down.
NOTICE
■Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders
Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bot-
tle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may
spill and glasses may break.
Bottle holders and cup holders
295
3-4. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
■Cup holder insert
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
Cup holder insert can be removed.
Cup holders
296
3-4. Using the storage features
Auxiliary boxes
Type A
Push the lid.
Type B
Push the lid.
Type C (if equipped)
Lift the lid.
Auxiliary boxes
297
3-4. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the auxiliary boxes closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident
may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open auxiliary box or the
items stored inside.
■Items unsuitable for storing (type A only)
Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall
out, resulting in an accident.
Auxiliary boxes
298
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors
To set the visor in the for-
ward position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side
position, flip down, unhook,
and swing it to the side.
To use the side extender,
place the visor in the side
position, then slide it back-
ward.
299
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Vanity mirrors
■To prevent battery discharge (vehicles with vanity lights)
If the vanity lights remain on for 20 minutes while the engine is off, the lights
will turn off automatically.
Slide the cover to open.
Vehicles with vanity lights: The
light turns on when the cover is
opened.
300
3-5. Other interior features
Clock
■The clock is displayed when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
■When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
Adjusts the hours
Adjusts the minutes
301
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Outside temperature display
■The outside temperature is displayed when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
The temperature display shows temperatures within the range of
-40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C).
Type A
Type B
302
3-5. Other interior features
■Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change:
●When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 16 mph
[25 km/h])
●When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
■When “E” is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
303
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Ashtray
CAUTION
■When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may
occur due to an occupant being struck by the open ashtray or ash flying out.
■To prevent fire
●Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray,
then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
●Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
An ashtray can be installed in
the cup holder. (P. 294)
: If equipped
304
3-5. Other interior features
Power outlets
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less
than 10 A.
Instrument cluster
305
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
■The power outlet can be used when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Center console (if equipped)
306
3-5. Other interior features
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-
cuit.
■To prevent blown fuse
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
307
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Seat heaters
■The seat heaters can be used when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■When not in use
Move the dial fully backward. The indicator light turns off.
On
The indicator light comes on.
Adjusts the seat tempera-
ture
The further you move the dial
forward, the warmer the seat
becomes.
Driver’s seat Front
passenger’s seat
: If equipped
308
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■Burns
●Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat
heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-
lenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
●Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.
●Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause
minor burns or overheating.
NOTICE
■To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do
not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■To prevent battery discharge
Turn the seat heaters off when the engine is not running.
309
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Armrest
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not apply too much load on the armrest.
Fold down the armrest for use.
310
3-5. Other interior features
Coat hooks
CAUTION
■Items that cannot be hung on the coat hook
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the
SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles,
causing death or serious injury.
311
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
Insert the retaining hooks
(clips) into the floor mat eye-
lets.
Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.
*: Always align the marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the
illustration.
STEP
1
STEP
2
*
312
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
■When installing the driver's floor mat
●Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
●Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
●Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
●Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
●Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■Before driving
●Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this check
after cleaning the floor.
●With the engine stopped and the shift
lever in P, fully depress each pedal to
the floor to make sure it does not inter-
fere with the floor mat.
313
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Trunk features
■Grocery bag hooks
314
3-5. Other interior features
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the hooks
Do not apply too much load to the hooks.
■Cargo net (if equipped)
315
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufac-
tured under license from HomeLink.
Programming HomeLink (for U.S. owners)
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Buttons
Indicator
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, secu-
rity systems, and other devices.
: If equipped
316
3-5. Other interior features
■Programming the HomeLink
Point the remote control trans-
mitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25
to 75 mm) from the HomeLink
control buttons.
Keep the HomeLink indicator
light in view while programming.
Press and hold one of the
HomeLink buttons and the
transmitter button. When the
HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both but-
tons.
If the HomeLink indicator light
comes on but does not flash, or
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and
remains lit, the HomeLink button
is already programmed. Use the
other buttons or follow the
“Reprogramming a HomeLink
button” instructions. (P. 319)
STEP
1
STEP
2
317
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Test the HomeLink operation
by pressing the newly pro-
grammed button.
If a HomeLink button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
remote control transmitter is of
the rolling code type. Press and
hold the programmed HomeLink
button. The remote control trans-
mitter is of the rolling code type if
the HomeLink indicator light
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and
then remains lit. If your transmit-
ter is of the rolling code type, pro-
ceed to the heading
“Programming a rolling code sys-
tem”.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S. owners)
If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming HomeLink” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
Locate the learn button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
motor for the location of the learn button.
Press the learn button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3
below.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
318
3-5. Other interior features
Press and hold the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button
for 2 seconds and then release it. Repeat this step once
again. The garage door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If
the door does not open, press and release the button a third time.
This third press and release will complete the programming process
by opening the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recog-
nize the HomeLink signal and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code sys-
tem for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■Programming an entry gate (for U.S. owners)/Programming a
device in the Canadian market
Place the remote control transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm)
away from the HomeLink buttons.
Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming.
Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the remote control
transmitter for 2 seconds each until step 4 is completed.
When the HomeLink indicator light starts to flash rapidly,
release the buttons.
Test the HomeLink operation by pressing the newly pro-
grammed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates
correctly.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home
door locks or lighting, contact your Toyota dealer for assistance.
■Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming
a HomeLink button” instructions.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
319
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Operating HomeLink
Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator
light should come on.
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send
a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.
Reprogramming a HomeLink button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink indicator light will start flashing slowly. Keep pressing the
HomeLink button and press and hold the transmitter button until the
HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash.
Release the buttons.
Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside but-
tons for 10 seconds until the indi-
cator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink memory.
320
3-5. Other interior features
■Before programming
●Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
●The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away
from the HomeLinkbutton.
■To prevent battery discharge
Vehicles without a smart key system:
HomeLink will turn off if a door has not been opened and closed for 20 min-
utes or the engine switch is left turned off. (After which programming cannot
be completed.) Open and close a door or turn the engine switch to the
“ACC” position to turn HomeLink on. We recommend programming while
the engine switch is in the “ACC” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
HomeLink will turn off if a door has not been opened and closed for 20 min-
utes or the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is left turned off. (After which pro-
gramming cannot be completed.) Open and close a door or turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode to turn HomeLink
on. We recommend programming while the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is in ACCESSORY mode.
■Certification for the garage door opener
U.S.A.
FCC ID: CB2051AHL4/CB251AHL4NR
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
321
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
■When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION
■When programming a garage door or other remote control devices
The garage door or other devices may operate, so ensure people and
objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink compatible transceiver with any garage door
opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A
door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious
injury.
322
3-5. Other interior features
Compass
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in
which the vehicle is heading.
■Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
press “AUTO” for more than 3
seconds.
■Displays and directions
Display Direction
NNorth
NE Northeast
EEast
SE Southeast
SSouth
SW Southwest
WWest
NW Northwest
: If equipped
323
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Calibrating the compass
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by
the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies depending
on the geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over one of the map boundaries shown in illustration, the
compass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to “Deviation calibra-
tion”.
■Deviation calibration
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold “AUTO”.
A number (1 to 15) appears on
the compass display.
STEP
1
STEP
2
324
3-5. Other interior features
Referring to the map above, press “AUTO” to select the num-
ber of the zone you are in.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the
calibration is complete.
■Circling calibration
When “C” appears on the dis-
play, drive the vehicle at 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less in a circle until a
direction is displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until a direction is dis-
played.
STEP
3
■Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
●The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
●The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
●The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to
interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking
lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near
an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).
●The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
●The battery has been disconnected.
●A door is open.
325
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
■When doing the circling calibration
Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the vicinity.
Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■To avoid compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction.
■To ensure normal operation of the compass
●Do not perform a circling calibration of the compass in a place where the
earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
●During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power win-
dows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
326
3-5. Other interior features
Safety Connect
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses
Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular tech-
nology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety
Connect is supported by Toyota’s designated response center,
which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select,
telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound
by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and
Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current
copy of which is available at Toyota.com. All use of the Safety Con-
nect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Condi-
tions.
■System components
Microphone
LED light indicators
“SOS” button
: if equipped
327
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
■Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services avail-
able:
●Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency
service providers. (P. 329)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
●Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 330)
●Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 330)
●Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 330)
■Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact
your Toyota dealer, call 1-800-331-4331, or push the “SOS” but-
ton in your vehicle for further subscription details.
328
3-5. Other interior features
■Safety Connect Services Information
●Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible
during Safety Connect.
●Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Toyota models.
Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the
telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection avail-
ability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to
reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enroll-
ment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety
of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term
selected.
●Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle
Location, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United
States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada. No Safety Connect
services will function outside of the United States in countries other than
Canada.
●Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecom-
munications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
■Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages.
The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish.
Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.
■When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
329
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with a smart key system) or the engine switch is
turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key system), the
red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward,
the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is
active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage
conditions:
●Green indicator light on = Active service
●Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
●Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunc-
tion (contact your Toyota dealer)
●No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
Safety Connect services
■Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision,
the system is designed to automatically call the response center.
The responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts
to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emer-
gency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent
automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest
emergency services provider to describe the situation, and
requests that assistance be sent to the location.
330
3-5. Other interior features
■Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local author-
ities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After fil-
ing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-
800-331-4331 and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate
this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen
vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under
certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your
vehicle. Further information is available at Toyota.com.
■Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button
to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering
agent will determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emer-
gency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent
that you are not experiencing an emergency.
■Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already
included warranty-based Toyota roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs,
such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the
Enhanced Roadside Assistance services and their limitations,
please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are
available at Toyota.com.
331
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power
radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio
frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wire-
less phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety stan-
dards previously set by the following U.S. and international
standards bodies.
●ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
●NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measure-
ment) Report 86 [1986]
●ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation
Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic eval-
uations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists,
engineers, and physicians from universities, and government
health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of
research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.
332
3-5. Other interior features
■Certification for Safety Connect
FCC ID: O9EGTM1
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Maintenance and care 4
333
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior......... 334
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.......... 337
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements.................. 340
General maintenance....... 342
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs........................ 346
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions .................... 347
Hood ................................ 350
Positioning a floor jack..... 351
Engine compartment........ 353
Tires................................. 367
Tire inflation pressure ...... 375
Wheels............................. 379
Air conditioning filter......... 382
Wireless remote control/
electronic key battery..... 384
Checking and replacing
fuses .............................. 389
Light bulbs........................ 401
334
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
■Automatic car washes
●Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front
of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.
●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface
and harm your vehicle’s paint.
●Vehicles with rear spoiler: In certain automatic car washes, the rear
spoiler may interfere with machine operation. This may prevent the vehi-
cle from being cleaned properly or result in damage to the rear spoiler.
■High pressure car washes
●Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity
of the windows.
●Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle
is closed properly.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition:
●Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any
dirt and dust.
●Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-
oughly with water.
●Wipe away any water.
●Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
335
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
■When using a car wash (vehicles with a smart key system)
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effec-
tive range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the
following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
●Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the
vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
●Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key
system. (P. 39)
■Aluminum wheels (if equipped)
●Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use
hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical
cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
●Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after
driving for long distance in the hot weather.
●Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
CAUTION
■When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
■Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled
sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
■ Precaution regarding the Blind Spot Monitor
If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may mal-
function. If this occurs, consult your Toyota dealer.
336
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-
nents (aluminum wheels etc.)
●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the
paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
●If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
●To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the wheels.
■Cleaning the exterior lights
●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
●Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
337
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and
keep it in top condition:
■Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-
faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■Cleaning the leather areas
●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
●Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened
with diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool deter-
gent.
●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain-
ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and venti-
lated area.
■Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
●Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
●Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a
sponge or soft cloth.
●Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the
dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
338
4-1. Maintenance and care
■Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year
to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.
■Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use
water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by
keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■Water in the vehicle
●Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch
fire.
●Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 101)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off
the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
339
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Cleaning detergents
●Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehi-
cle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline,
alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alco-
hol
●Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other
interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
●Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
●Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
●Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the uphol-
stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats
up significantly.
■Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or
under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■Cleaning the inside of the rear window
●Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth
dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the
window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
●Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
340
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
■Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure
performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or
if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the war-
ranty coverage.
■Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance
schedule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedures described below:
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform
regular checks. Toyota recommends performing the following main-
tenance:
■General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis.
This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.
■Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified inter-
vals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
■Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war-
ranty coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s War-
ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
341
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Turn the engine switch (vehicles without a smart key system) or the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch (vehicles with a smart key system)
off with the trip meter A reading shown. (P. 172)
While pressing the display change button (P. 169), turn the
engine switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key
system) or “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode
(vehicles with a smart key system)
Continue to press and hold the knob until the trip meter displays
“000000”.
■Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
●Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date
with the latest service information. They are well informed about the
operations of all systems on your vehicle.
●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has
been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise
while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly
take care of it.
CAUTION
■If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and
possible serious injury or death.
■Handling of the battery
●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.
●Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
●Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands
after handling. (P. 363)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
342
4-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Battery Check the connections.
(P. 363)
Brake fluid Is the brake fluid at the correct
level? (P. 361)
Engine coolant Is the engine coolant at the
correct level? (P. 360)
Engine oil Is the engine oil at the correct
level? (P. 355)
Exhaust system There should not be any fumes or
strange sounds.
Radiator/condenser
The radiator and condenser
should be free from foreign
objects. (P. 361)
Washer fluid Is there sufficient washer fluid?
(P. 366)
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be per-
formed at the intervals specified in the “Owner's Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified
service shop for advice.
343
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator pedal
• The accelerator pedal should
move smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching).
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
• When parked on a slope and the
shift lever is in P, is the vehicle
securely stopped?
Brake pedal
• Does the brake pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appro-
priate clearance from the floor?
(P. 473)
• Does the brake pedal have the
correct amount of free play?
(P. 473)
Brakes
• The vehicle should not pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effec-
tively.
• The brake pedal should not feel
spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get
too close to the floor when the
brakes are applied.
Head restraints (front seat) • Do the head restraints move
smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers • Do the indicators and buzzers
function properly?
Lights • Do all the lights come on?
Parking brake
• Does the parking brake pedal
move smoothly?
• When parked on a slope and the
parking brake is on, is the vehicle
securely stopped?
344
4-2. Maintenance
Seat belts
• Do the seat belts operate
smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be dam-
aged.
Seats • Do the seat controls operate
properly?
Steering wheel
• Does the steering wheel rotate
smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the
correct amount of free play?
• There should not be any strange
sounds coming from the steering
wheel.
Items Check points
345
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Doors/trunk • Do the doors and trunk operate
smoothly?
Engine hood • Does the engine hood lock sys-
tem work properly?
Fluid leaks
• There should not be any signs of
fluid leakage after the vehicle has
been parked.
Tires
• Is the tire inflation pressure cor-
rect?
• The tires should not be dam-
aged or excessively worn.
• Have the tires been rotated
according to the maintenance
schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be
loose.
CAUTION
■If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before per-
forming maintenance checks.
346
4-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which
include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system moni-
tors the operation of the emission control system.
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere
in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/
M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer
to service the vehicle.
■Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situa-
tions:
●When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are
erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes
may not be completely set.
●When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a tempo-
rary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after
several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
347
4
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedures as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition (P. 363)
•Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (P. 361)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
brake fluid)
Engine coolant level (P. 360)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol-based non-silicate, non-
amine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50%
coolant and 50% deionized
water.
Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55%
coolant and 45% deionized
water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
348
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items Parts and tools
Engine oil level P. 355)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine oil)
Fuses (P. 389) • Fuse with same amperage rating
as original
Light bulbs (P. 401)
• Bulb with same number and watt-
age rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Flathead screwdriver
• Wrench
Radiator and condenser
(P. 361)
Tire inflation pressure (P. 375) • Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Washer fluid (P. 366)
• Water or washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding
water or washer fluid)
349
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury, observe the following precautions:
■When working on the engine compartment:
●Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
●Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the
engine compartment.
●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-
tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
●Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
■When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Vehicles without a smart key system: Be sure the engine switch is off. With
the engine switch in the “ON” position, the electric cooling fans may auto-
matically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant tempera-
ture is high. (P. 361)
Vehicles with a smart key system: Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is off. With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON
mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air condi-
tioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 361)
■Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from
getting in your eyes.
NOTICE
■If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear
due to dirt in the air. Also, a backfire could cause a fire in the engine com-
partment.
350
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
CAUTION
■Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Pull up the auxiliary catch
lever and lift the hood.
STEP
1
STEP
2
351
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack cor-
rectly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
■Front
■Rear
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
CTY43AV171
352
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury:
●When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with
the jack.
●Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
●Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is sup-
ported only by the floor jack.
●Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level
surface.
●Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
●Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift
the shift lever to P.
●Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage
the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
●When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath
the floor jack.
●Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack
such as the one shown in the illustra-
tion.
353
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine compartment
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 357)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 355)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 361)
Fuse box (P. 389)
Battery (P. 363)
Radiator (P. 361)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser (P. 361)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 360)
Washer fluid tank (P. 366)
354
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 357)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 355)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 361)
Fuse box (P. 389)
Battery (P. 363)
Radiator (P. 361)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser (P. 361)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 360)
Washer fluid tank (P. 366)
355
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the bottom of the engine.
Hold a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
356
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
Low
Full
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Low
Full
357
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as that
already in the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
Engine oil selection P. 469
Oil quantity
(Low Full) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.)
Items Clean funnel
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
358
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Engine oil consumption
●The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the
quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
●More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and
frequent acceleration and deceleration.
●A new engine consumes more oil.
●When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil
may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accu-
rately.
●Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles (0.9 Imp. qt./600 miles, 1.0 L/
1000 km)
●If your vehicle consumes more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.) every 600
miles (1000 km), contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■Used engine oil
●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should
be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine
oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or disposal.
●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
359
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■When replacing the engine oil
●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
●Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged.
●Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
360
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on
the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“F” line
“L” line
If the level is on or below the “L”
line, add coolant up to the “F” line.
(P. 459)
■Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant
and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31F [-35C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant
and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44F [-42C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
■If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir caps, drain cock
and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not remove the engine coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
361
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign
objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Brake fluid
■Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
“MAX”
“MIN”
NOTICE
■When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause seri-
ous injuries, such as burns.
362
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Item Clean funnel
■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking
efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean
water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.
363
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Battery
Check the battery as follows:
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
■Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:
●If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-
nect the ground cable.
●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and
disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.
364
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■After recharging/reconnecting the battery (vehicles with a smart key
system)
●Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible
immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wire-
less remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
●Start the engine with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCES-
SORY mode. The engine may not start with the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch turned off. However, the engine will operate normally from the sec-
ond attempt.
●The “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If
the battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was discon-
nected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnect the battery.
Take extra care when connecting the battery if the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.
If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toyota
dealer.
CAUTION
■Chemicals in the battery
Batteries contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the
battery:
●Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
●Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
●Keep children away from the battery.
365
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
■Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
●If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
●If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
●If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-
ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
NOTICE
■When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
366
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Washer fluid
Add washer fluid in the following
situations.
●Any washer does not work.
●The low washer fluid warning
light comes on.
CAUTION
■When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-
tle.
367
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched-
ules and treadwear.
■Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear
indicators is shown by the
“TWI” or “ ” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of
each tire.
Check spare tire condition
and pressure if not rotated.
■Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and
extend tire life, Toyota recom-
mends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same inter-
val as tire inspection.
■Tire pressure warning system (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system
that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect
low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.
(P. 423)
Front
368
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warn-
ing computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initial-
ized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes
registered by your Toyota dealer. (P. 369)
■The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the fol-
lowing circumstances:
●When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when
changing travelling speed or load weight
●When changing the tire size
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch
(vehicles without a smart key system) or the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch (vehicles with a smart key system) off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. (P. 474)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire
inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will
operate based on this pressure level.
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a
smart key system) or “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
369
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Press and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.
Vehicles without a smart key system: Wait for a few minutes
with the engine switch in the “ON” position and then turn the
engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Wait for a few minutes with
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode
and then turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code
registered by your Toyota dealer.
STEP
4
STEP
5
370
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage
●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the
size or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
■Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not
registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After
driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.
■Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even
if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of
your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■Low profile tires (vehicles with 18-inch tires)
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip perfor-
mance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to
standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or
icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather
conditions.
371
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2
of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the
rear axle, whichever is greater.
■Tire types
●Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When
installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
●All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use
year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,
all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance
compared with summer tires in highway driving.
●Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con-
struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels. (P. 218)
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the
tire, see the load limit at maximum cold
tire inflation pressure mentioned on the
sidewall of the tire. (P. 481)
372
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the speci-
fied level.
■If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■If you press the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the speci-
fied level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
■When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has
failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the follow-
ing cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not
operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure
settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
●When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pres-
sure warning light does not blink 3 times.
●After driving for a certain period of time since the initialization has
been completed, the warning light comes on after blinking for 1
minute.
■Certification for the tire pressure warning system
FCC ID: PAXPMVC010
FCC ID: HYQ23AAD
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment.
373
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as
dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
●Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
●Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
●Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
●Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
■When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjust-
ing the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire
pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure
is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually nor-
mal.
374
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,
transmitters and tire valve caps
●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pres-
sure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled
correctly.
●When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than
those specified. The cap may become stuck.
■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 368)
■Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot-
holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing
the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may
cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels
and body.
■Low profile tires (vehicles with 18-inch tires)
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel
when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention
to the following:
●Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated,
they may be damaged more severely.
●Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Fail-
ure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
376
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended
level, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to
deflate.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement
and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check
for leakage.
Put the tire valve cap back on.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
377
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
●Reduced fuel efficiency
●Reduced driving comfort and tire life
●Reduced safety
●Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
●Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.
●Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire infla-
tion pressure that is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality
and handling.
●Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire
inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle
is balanced.
378
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions
may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:
●Excessive wear
●Uneven wear
●Poor handling
●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●Poor sealing of the tire bead
●Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
●A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and
cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost,
replace them as soon as possible.
379
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or
cause a loss of handling control.
■Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,
rim width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using the following:
●Wheels of different sizes or types
●Used wheels
●Bent wheels that have been straightened
■Aluminum wheel precautions (if equipped)
●Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use
with your aluminum wheels.
●When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
●Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
●Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and
use a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
380
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■When replacing wheels (vehicles with a tire pressure warning sys-
tem)
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to
provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.
Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters must be installed. (P. 368)
CAUTION
■When replacing wheels
●Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in
the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a
tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or seri-
ous injury.
■When installing the wheel nuts
●Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
●Be sure to install the wheel nuts with
the tapered ends facing inward.
Installing the nuts with the tapered
ends facing outward can cause the
wheel to break and eventually cause
the wheel to come off while driving,
which could lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
Tapered portion
381
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles
with a tire pressure warning system)
●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your
Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your
Toyota dealer.
●Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly
with non-genuine wheels.
382
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.
■Removal method
Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine
switch off.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch off.
Open the glove box and
remove the glove box cover
inside the glove box.
Remove the filter cover.
■Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning
filter and replace it with a new
one.
The “UP” marks shown on
the filter should be pointing up.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
383
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement
may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to
the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
■If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the
system.
384
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wireless remote control/electronic key battery
: If equipped
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
■You will need the following items:
●Flathead screwdriver
●Small flathead screwdriver
●Lithium battery CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key sys-
tem), or CR2032 (vehicles with a smart key system)
■Replacing the battery (vehicles without a smart key system)
Type A
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
To prevent the buttons from
being disassembled, face the
button surface downward.
Remove the module.
STEP
1
STEP
2
385
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Open the case cover using a
coin protected with tape etc.
and remove the depleted bat-
tery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
Type B
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
To prevent the buttons from
being disassembled, face the
button surface downward.
Remove the module.
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
386
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Open the case cover using a
coin protected with tape etc.
and remove the depleted bat-
tery using a small flathead
screwdriver.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
■Replacing the battery (vehicles with a smart key system)
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
387
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Use a CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key system) or CR2032 (vehi-
cles with a smart key system) lithium battery
●Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appli-
ance shops or camera stores.
●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
●Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
■If the key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
●The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function prop-
erly.
●The operational range will be reduced.
CAUTION
■Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child,
they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.
Remove the depleted battery
using a small flathead screw-
driver.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
STEP
3
388
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
●Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
●Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
●Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
389
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine
switch off.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch off.
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tabs in and lift the lid
off.
Under the instrument panel
Remove the lid.
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage rat-
ings” (P. 392) for details about which fuse to check.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
390
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the fuse.
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pullout
tool.
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amper-
age rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amper-
age rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.
STEP
4
STEP
5
391
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
392
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■Engine compartment
Fuse block
Fuse block on the back of the cover
393
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 METER-IG2 5 A Gauge and meters
2FAN*
150 A Electric cooling fans
3 H-LP CLN 30 A No circuit
4 HTR 50 A Air conditioning system
5 ALT 120 A Charging system
6 ABS NO.2 30 A Vehicle stability control system
7 ST/AM2 30 A Starter system, ECU-IG2 NO.1,
A/B, ECU-IG2 NO.2
8 H-LP-MAIN 30 A H-LP LH-LO, H-LP RH-LO, MNL
H-LP LVL, headlights (low beam)
9 ABS NO.1 50 A Vehicle stability control system
10 EPS 80 A Electric power steering
11 S-HORN 7.5 A S-HORN
12 HORN 10 A Horns
13 EFI NO.2 15 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, electronic controlled trans-
mission
14 EFI NO.3
7.5 A*2Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
10 A*1
15 INJ 7.5 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
16 ECU-IG2 NO.3 7.5 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, steering lock system, elec-
tronic controlled transmission
17 IGN 15 A Starter system
18 D/L-AM2 20 A No circuit
394
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
19 IG2-MAIN 25 A
IGN, INJ, METER-IG2, ECU-IG2
NO.3, A/B, ECU-IG2 NO.2, ECU-
IG2 NO.1
20 ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system
21 MAYDAY 5 A MAYDAY
22 TURN&HAZ 15 A Turn signal lights, emergency
flashers, gauge and meters
23 STRG LOCK 10 A Steering lock system
24 AMP 15 A Audio system
25 H-LP LH-LO 15 A*3Left-hand headlight (low beam),
manual headlight leveling system
20 A*4
26 H-LP RH-LO 15 A*3
Right-hand headlight (low beam)
20 A*4
27 MNL H-LP
LVL*47.5 A Manual headlight leveling system
28 EFI-MAIN NO.1 30 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, EFI NO.2, EFI NO.3, A/F
sensor
29 SMART 5 A No circuit
30 ETCS 10 A Electronic throttle control system
31 TOWING 20 A No circuit
32 EFI NO.1 7.5 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, electronic controlled trans-
mission
33
EFI-MAIN
NO.2*220 A A/F sensor
A/F*1
34 AM2 7.5 A Smart key system
Fuse Ampere Circuit
395
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
*1: 3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
*2: 2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
*3:Vehicles with halogen headlight
*4:Vehicles with discharge headlight
35 RADIO-B 20 A Audio system, navigation system
36 DOME 7.5 A
Clock, vanity lights, interior lights,
personal lights, trunk light, door
courtesy lights
37 ECU-B NO.1 10 A
Multiplex communication system,
smart key system, gauge and
meters, tire pressure warning sys-
tem, wireless remote control, steer-
ing sensor, front passenger
occupant classification system,
Blind Spot Monitor
38 SPARE 25 A Spare fuse
39 SPARE 30 A Spare fuse
Fuse Ampere Circuit
396
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Under the instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 ECU-IG1 NO.2 10 A
Shift lock control system, seat
heaters, smart key system, tire
pressure warning system, wireless
remote control, multiplex communi-
cation system, audio system, navi-
gation system, moon roof, auto
anti-glare inside rear view mirror
2 ECU-IG1 NO.1 10 A
Vehicle stability control system,
electric cooling fans, steering sen-
sor, multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, charging system, rear win-
dow defogger, outside rear view
mirror defoggers, Blind Spot Moni-
tor
3 PANEL 10 A
Switch illumination, air condition-
ing system, shift lever light, glove
box light, interior lights, personal
lights, audio system, navigation
system
397
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
4 TAIL 15 A
Parking lights, side marker lights,
tail lights, license plate lights, fog
lights
5 EPS-IG1 7.5 A Electric power steering
6 ECU-IG1 NO.3 7.5 A Blind Spot Monitor
7S/HTR&FAN
F/L 10 A Seat heaters
8 H-LP LVL 7.5 A No circuit
9 WASHER 10 A Windshield wipers and washer
10 A/C-IG1 7.5 A Air conditioning system
11 WIPER 25 A Windshield wipers and washer
12 BKUP LP 7.5 A
Back-up lights, multiport fuel injec-
tion system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system, electronic
controlled transmission, audio sys-
tem, navigation system
13 DOOR NO.1 30 A Power windows
14 WIPER-S 5 A No circuit
15 P/OUTLET RR 20 A Power outlet
16 SFT LOCK-
ACC 5 A Shift lock control system
17 DOOR R/R 20 A Rear right-hand power windows
18 DOOR R/L 20 A Rear left-hand power windows
19 OBD 10 A On-Board diagnosis system
20 ECU-B NO.2 10 A Smart key system, tire pressure
warning system
21 DOOR NO.2 20 A Power windows
22 AM1 7.5 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, starter system
Fuse Ampere Circuit
398
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
23 STOP 7.5 A
Tail lights, multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, vehicle stability
control system, anti-lock brake sys-
tem, electronic controlled transmis-
sion, high mounted stoplight, smart
key system, shift lock control sys-
tem
24 P/SEAT RR 30 A No circuit
25 A/C-B 7.5 A Air conditioning system
26 S/ROOF 10 A Moon roof
27 P/SEAT FR 30 A Power seats
28 PSB 30 A No circuit
29 D/L-AM1 20 A
Multiplex communication system,
power door lock, trunk opener
switch
30 TI&TE 20 A No circuit
31 A/B 10 A Front passenger occupant classifi-
cation system, SRS airbag system
32 ECU-IG2 NO.1 7.5 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
33 ECU-IG2 NO.2 7.5 A Smart key system, Blind Spot Mon-
itor
34 CIG&P/
OUTLET 15 A Power outlet
35 ECU-ACC 7.5 A
Clock, outside rear view mirrors,
multiplex communication system,
audio system, navigation system
36 S/HTR&FAN F/
R10 A Seat heaters
37 S/HTR RR 20 A No circuit
Fuse Ampere Circuit
399
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■After a fuse is replaced
●If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb
may need replacement. (P. 401)
●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
■When replacing light bulbs
Toyota recommends that you use genuine Toyota products designed for this
vehicle. Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent
overload, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be
unusable.
400
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use
any other object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
●Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
NOTICE
■Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
401
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level
of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb
replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your
Toyota dealer.
■Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 477)
■Front bulb locations
Headlight low beam
(halogen bulb)
Headlight high beam
and daytime running
light
Front side marker light
Front turn signal/park-
ing light
Fog light (if equipped)
402
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing light bulbs
■Headlight high beam and daytime running light
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
■Rear bulb locations
Rear turn signal light
Stop/tail light License plate lights
Back-up light
Rear side marker light
STEP
1
STEP
2
403
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Headlight low beam (halogen bulb)
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
■Fog light (if equipped)
Turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the fog light
that you wish to replace.
For example, if you wish to
replace the fog light on the left
side, turn the steering wheel to
the right.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
404
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the fender liner clip.
After turning the clip, pull the
clip until it stops.
Turn the clip again, and then
pull out the clip.
Partly remove the fender liner
and unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
405
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Front turn signal/parking light
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
■Front side marker light
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
406
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the light bulb.
■Rear side marker light, rear turn signal light and stop/tail light
Open the trunk lid and remove
the luggage trim cover clips.
Pull the hook while depressing
the button.
Partly remove the luggage trim
cover.
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
The button
STEP
3
407
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Rear side marker light
Rear turn signal light
Stop/tail light
Remove the light bulb.
Rear side marker light
Rear turn signal light
Stop/tail light
■Back-up light
Open the trunk lid and remove
the clips. Then partly remove the
trunk panel cover.
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
408
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
■License plate light
Remove the lens.
Insert a properly sized Allen key
into the hole of the lens, and pry
off the lens as shown in the illus-
tration.
To prevent damaging the vehicle,
wrap the tip of the Allen key with
a tape.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
409
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Lights other than the above
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by
your Toyota dealer.
●Headlight low beams (discharge bulb)
●High mounted stoplight
■Discharge headlights (if equipped)
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on,
or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal
power is restored.
■LED light bulbs
The high mounted stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs
burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.
■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations.
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does
not indicate a malfunction.
●Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
●Water has built up inside the headlight.
410
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Removing and installing the clips
The luggage trim cover and trunk panel cover clip
The fender liner clip
■When replacing light bulbs
P. 399
CAUTION
■Replacing light bulbs
●Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after
turning off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
●Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the
bulb by the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
●Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
Removing
Installing
Installing
411
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Discharge headlights (if equipped)
●Contact your Toyota dealer before replacing the discharge headlights
(including light bulbs).
●Do not touch the discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the head-
lights are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 30000 V will be discharged and could result
in serious injury or death by electric shock.
●Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam discharge headlight
bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.
■To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
●Vehicles with discharge headlights:
While the low beam headlights are
turned on, and for a short time after
they have been turned off, metal com-
ponents at the rear of the headlight
assembly will be extremely hot. To pre-
vent burns, do not touch these metal
components until you are certain they
have cooled down.
Metal
components
412
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When trouble arises 5
413
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ......... 414
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ........................ 415
If you think something
is wrong ......................... 418
Fuel pump shut off
system ........................... 419
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... ....................... 420
If you have a flat tire......... 435
If the engine will not
start................................ 447
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P............ 449
If you lose your keys ........ 450
If the electronic key
does not operate
properly.......................... 451
If the battery is
discharged ..................... 454
If your vehicle
overheats ....................... 459
If the vehicle becomes
stuck .............................. 462
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency..................... 463
414
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is
involved in an accident.
Press the switch to flash all
the turn signal lights. To turn
them off, press the switch
once again.
5
When trouble arises
415
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Toyota dealer before towing.
●The engine is running but the vehicle will not move.
●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type
truck or flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/pro-
vincial and local laws.
416
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front
Release the parking brake.
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
Using a flatbed truck
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be
damaged.
5
When trouble arises
417
5-1. Essential information
NOTICE
■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission when towing
using a wheel-lift type truck
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground.
■To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
■To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
418
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
■Visible symptoms
●Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
●The rightmost segment of the engine coolant temperature dis-
play flashes
■Audible symptoms
●Changes in exhaust sound
●Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●Strange noises related to the suspension system
●Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■Operational symptoms
●Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
●Appreciable loss of power
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
●Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor
5
When trouble arises
419
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
Vehicles without a smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Restart the engine.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when
an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system
stops the supply of fuel to the engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
420
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-
tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer: The buzzer sounds to indicate that
the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights
comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes
off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
5
When trouble arises
421
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi-
cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Low engine oil pressure warning light
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.
Type A
Type B
High engine coolant temperature warning light (the
rightmost segment of the engine coolant temperature
display flashes)
Indicates that the engine is almost overheating. (P. 459)
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronic engine control system; or
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system.
422
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system; or
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system.
(Comes on in
yellow)
Cruise control indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system.
P. 199
(Comes on)
Slip indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• VSC system; or
• TRAC system.
Electric power steering system warning light (warning
buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS system.
(Comes on)
BSM warning light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor.
(Flashes in
yellow for 15
seconds.)
Smart key system indicator light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the smart key system.
Warning light Warning light/Details
5
When trouble arises
423
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light goes off.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that a door or the
trunk is not fully closed.
Check that all doors and the
trunk are closed.
Low fuel level warning
light
Indicates remaining fuel is
approximately 2.6 gal. (9.7
L, 2.1 Imp. gal.) or less.
Refuel the vehicle.
Driver’s/front passen-
ger’s seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver/front pas-
senger to fasten his/her
seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
Low windshield washer
fluid warning light
Low level of washer fluid.
Fill the tank.
424
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(U.S.A. only)
Maintenance required
reminder light
Indicates that mainte-
nance is required accord-
ing to the driven distance
on the maintenance
schedule*3.
Illuminates for about 3 sec-
onds and then flashes for
about 15 seconds approxi-
mately 4500 miles (7200
km) after the maintenance
data has been reset.
If necessary, perform main-
tenance.
Comes on and remains on if
the distance driven exceeds
5000 miles (8000 km) after
the maintenance data has
been reset.
(The indicator will not work
properly unless the mainte-
nance data has been reset.)
Perform the necessary
maintenance.
Please reset the mainte-
nance data after the mainte-
nance is performed.
(P. 340)
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
425
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*1: Open door warning buzzer:
The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that one or more of
the doors is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3
mph [5 km/h]).
*2: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:
Vehicles without a smart key system
The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat
belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position,
the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30
seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the
seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20
more seconds.
(U.S.A. only)
Tire pressure warning
light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure
such as
• Natural causes (P. 430)
• Flat tire (P. 435)
Adjust the tire inflation
pressure to the specified
level.
The light will turn off after
a few minutes. In case
the light does not turn off
even if the tire inflation
pressure is adjusted,
have the system checked
by your Toyota dealer.
When the light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire
pressure warning system.
(P. 432)
Have the system checked
by your Toyota dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
426
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Vehicles with a smart key system
The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat
belt is not fastened. Once the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to
ON mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed
of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfas-
tened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds.
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different
tone for 20 more seconds.
Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger
that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehi-
cle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened
after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then,
if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for
20 more seconds.
*3: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
5
When trouble arises
427
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures. (vehicles with a smart key system)
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light goes off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light Warning light/Details Correction
procedure
Continuous
Continuous
(Flashes
in yellow)
Smart key system indicator
light
The electronic key was car-
ried outside the vehicle and
the driver’s door was opened
and closed while any shift
position other than P was
selected without turning off
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch.
• Change the
shift position
to P.
• Bring the
electronic key
back into the
vehicle.
Once
3 times
(Flashes
in yellow)
Smart key system indicator
light
The electronic key was car-
ried outside the vehicle and
the driver’s door was opened
and closed while the shift
position P was selected with-
out turning off the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch.
Turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP” switch
off or bring
the electronic
key back into
the vehicle.
Once
3 times
(Flashes
in yellow)
Smart key system indicator
light
Indicates that a door other
than the driver’s door has
been opened and closed with
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch in any mode other
than off and the electronic
key outside of the detection
area.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key.
428
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
Continuous
(5 seconds)
(Flashes
in yellow)
Smart key system indicator
light
An attempt was made to exit
the vehicle with the elec-
tronic key and lock the doors
without first turning the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch off.
Turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP” switch
off and lock
the doors
again.
Once (Flashes
in yellow
for 15
seconds.)
Smart key system indicator
light
Indicates that the electronic
key is not present when
attempting to start the
engine.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key.
9 times (Flashes
in yellow)
Smart key system indicator
light
An attempt was made to
drive when the regular key
was not inside the vehicle.
Confirm that
the electronic
key is inside
the vehicle.
Once (Flashes
in yellow
for 15
seconds.)
Smart key system indicator
light
Indicates that the electronic
key battery is low.
Replace the
battery.
(P. 384)
Once (Flashes
quickly in
green for
15 sec-
onds.)
Smart key system indicator
light
Indicates that the steering
lock has not been released.
Release the
steering lock.
(P. 152)
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light Warning light/Details Correction
procedure
5
When trouble arises
429
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once (Flashes
in yellow
for 30
seconds.)
Smart key system indicator
light
• When the doors were
unlocked with the mechani-
cal key and then the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch was pressed, the
electronic key could not be
detected in the vehicle.
• The electronic key could
not be detected in the vehi-
cle even after the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch was
pressed two consecutive
times.
Touch the
electronic key
to the
“ENGINE
START
STOP” switch
while
depressing
the brake
pedal.
■SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag
sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sen-
sors, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors), “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light, front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, seat belt preten-
sioner assemblies, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
(P. 100)
■Front passenger detection sensor, passenger seat belt reminder and
warning buzzer
●If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning
buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
●If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passen-
ger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light Warning light/Details Correction
procedure
430
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
●Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
●Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several driving trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, con-
tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
■When the tire pressure warning light comes on (if equipped)
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire
pressure warning light.
■The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes
(vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by tem-
perature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
5
When trouble arises
431
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire (vehicles with a tire pres-
sure warning system)
The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will
not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare
tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire infla-
tion pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few min-
utes.
■If the tire pressure warning system is not functioning (vehicles with
a tire pressure warning system)
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters are used
●If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is
not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
●If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or
higher
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies
are nearby.
●If a radio set at a similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle
●If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed
●If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the
wheels or wheel housings
●If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota
wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with
some types of tires.)
●If tire chains are used
432
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking
for 1 minute (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1
minute when the engine switch (vehicles without a smart key system) or
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch (vehicles with a smart key system) is
turned on, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
The electric power steering system warning light may come on and the
warning buzzer may sound when the voltage is low or the voltage drops.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features P. 493) However, Toyota recommends that the
seat belt reminder buzzer be operational to alert the driver and front passen-
ger that the seat belts are not fastened.
CAUTION
■When the electric power steering system warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold
firmly and operate using more force than usual.
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on (vehicles with a tire
pressure warning system)
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could
cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
●Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire
inflation pressure immediately.
●If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres-
sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.
If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire
repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.
●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
5
When trouble arises
433
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur (vehicles with a tire
pressure warning system)
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
■Maintenance of the tires (vehicles with a tire pressure warning sys-
tem)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a differ-
ent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a sub-
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).
434
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operat-
ing properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indi-
cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a vari-
ety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pres-
sure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to
continue to function properly.
NOTICE
■Precaution when installing a different tire (vehicles with a tire pres-
sure warning system)
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pres-
sure warning system may not operate properly.
5
When trouble arises
435
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■Before jacking up the vehicle
●Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
●Set the parking brake.
●Shift the shift lever to P.
●Stop the engine.
●Turn on the emergency flashers.
■Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Spare tire
Luggage floor
cover
Wheel nut
wrench
Jack
Jack handle
Spare tire cover
436
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack
Remove the luggage floor cover
and spare tire cover.
Remove the jack.
STEP
1
STEP
2
5
When trouble arises
437
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
Remove the luggage floor cover
and spare tire cover.
Remove the tool tray.
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
When taking out or stowing the
spare tire, make sure to firmly
hold opposite ends of the tire.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
438
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
For vehicles with steel wheels,
remove the wheel ornament
using the wrench.
To protect the wheel ornament,
place a rag between the wrench
and the wheel ornament, as
shown in the illustration.
STEP
1
Flat tire Wheel
chock posi-
tions
Front
Left-
hand
side
Behind the
rear right-
hand side
tire
Right-
hand
side
Behind the
rear left-
hand side
tire
Rear
Left-
hand
side
In front of
the front
right-hand
side tire
Right-
hand
side
In front of
the front
left-hand
side tire
STEP
2
5
When trouble arises
439
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is
in contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are
located under the rocker panel.
They indicate the jack point
positions.
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
440
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
Installing the spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is
in motion, causing the tire to
come off.
Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
When replacing a steel wheel
with a steel wheel, tighten the
wheel nuts until the tapered por-
tion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
STEP
6
STEP
1
STEP
2
Disc wheel
seat
Tapered portion
5
When trouble arises
441
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When replacing an aluminum
wheel with a steel wheel, tighten
the wheel nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each wheel nut
two or three times in the order
shown in the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
442
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■The compact spare tire
●The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.
●Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare
tire. (P. 474)
■After completing the tire change (vehicles with a tire pressure
warning system)
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 368)
■When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be
indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the
compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the
light remains on.
■If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice
Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle.
Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:
Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of
the vehicle.
Fit tire chains to the front tires.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
443
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■When using the compact spare tire
●Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed
for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another
vehicle.
●Do not use more than one compact spare tire simultaneously.
●Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
●Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp
cornering.
■When storing the compact spare tire
Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the compact
spare tire and the body of the vehicle.
■When the compact spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following sys-
tems may not operate correctly:
●ABS & Brake assist
●Cruise control
●VSC
●TRAC
●EPS
●Navigation system (if equipped)
■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact
spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure
to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or seri-
ous injury.
444
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off
the jack, leading to death or serious injury.
●Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat
tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for
replacing tires on this vehicle.
●Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack.
●Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the
jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to
replace the tire.
●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one
working on or near the vehicle may be injured.
5
When trouble arises
445
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Replacing a flat tire
●Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immedi-
ately after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around
the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet
or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
●Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103
N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off
the wheel while the vehicle is moving.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifi-
cally designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut
threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the
tapered ends facing inward. (P. 380)
446
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
■Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire
installed on the vehicle.
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire
compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving
over uneven road surfaces.
■Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving
performance.
■When replacing the tires (vehicles with a tire pressure warning sys-
tem)
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters (if equipped)
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 368)
5
When trouble arises
447
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures
are being followed (P. 145, 148), consider each of the following
points:
■The engine will not start even though the starter motor
operates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
●The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting proce-
dures. (P. 145, 148)
●There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 92)
■The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and
headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at
a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●The battery may be discharged. (P. 454)
●The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
■The starter motor does not turn over (vehicles with a smart
key system).
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an
electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. How-
ever, an interim measure is available to start the engine.
(P. 448)
448
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency start function (vehicles with a smart key system)
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as
an interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is functioning normally:
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY
mode.
Press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for about
15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
■The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and
headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
●The battery may be discharged. (P. 454)
●There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system (vehi-
cles with a smart key system).
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
5
When trouble arises
449
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal,
there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to pre-
vent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to
ensure that the shift lever can be shifted:
Set the parking brake.
Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine
switch to the “ACC” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flat-
head screwdriver or equiva-
lent.
Press the shift lock override
button.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
450
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. For vehicles
without the smart key system, bring a master key and the key num-
ber stamped on the key number plate. For vehicles with the smart
key system, bring the other key and the key number stamped on the
key number plate.
5
When trouble arises
451
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with a smart key system)
Locking and unlocking the doors and key linked functions
Using the mechanical key (P. 29)
in order to perform the following
operations (driver’s door only):
Locks all doors
Closes the windows and moon
roof (turn and hold)*
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver's door. Turning the key
once again unlocks the other
doors.
Opens the windows and moon
roof (turn and hold)*
*: This setting must be custom-
ized at your Toyota dealer.
If communication between the electronic key and the vehicle is inter-
rupted (P. 40) or the electronic key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote con-
trol cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be
opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure
below.
452
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Starting the engine
Ensure that the shift lever is in P and firmly depress the brake
pedal.
Touch the Toyota emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch will turn to IGNITION ON
mode.
When the smart key system is deactivated in customization setting,
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will turn to ACCESSORY mode.
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch with brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the
switch is pressed.)
Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that the smart key
system indicator light (green) turns on.
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be
operated, contact your Toyota dealer.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
5
When trouble arises
453
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as
you normally do when stopping the engine.
■Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(P. 384)
■If the doors cannot be locked or unlocked by the smart key system
Lock and unlock the doors by the mechanical key or wireless remote control.
■When the electronic key does not work properly
●Make sure that the smart key system has not been deactivated in the
customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features P. 493)
●Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function.
(P. 39)
454
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehi-
cle's battery is discharged.
You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi-
cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by follow-
ing the steps below.
Open the hood. (P. 350)
Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in
the illustration.
STEP
1
STEP
2
5
When trouble arises
455
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Open and close any of
the doors with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
Vehicles without a smart key system: Maintain the engine
speed of the second vehicle and turn the engine switch to
the “ON” position, then start the vehicle's engine.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Maintain the engine
speed of the second vehicle and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode, then start the vehi-
cle's engine.
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order from which they were con-
nected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
456
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■To prevent battery discharge
●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-
ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■Precautions when the battery is discharged (vehicles with a smart key
system)
●In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart
key system when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote con-
trol or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
●The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has
recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a
malfunction.
●The “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode is memorized by the vehicle.
When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it
was in before the battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the bat-
tery, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the “ENGINE START STOP” switch was in
before the battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting
the battery.
5
When trouble arises
457
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-
mable gas that may be emitted from the battery:
●Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that
it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
●Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact
with each other.
●Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the battery.
■Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-
cautions when handling the battery:
●When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
●Do not lean over the battery.
●In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
●Do not allow children near the battery.
■To prevent damage to the vehicle
Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle as the three-way catalytic converter
may overheat and become a fire hazard.
458
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entan-
gled in the cooling fans or belt.
5
When trouble arises
459
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condi-
tioning system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam sub-
sides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
Check to see if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the high engine coolant temperature warning light
goes off and then stop the engine.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and call your Toyota dealer.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
engine coolant level and
inspect the radiator core (radi-
ator) for any leaks.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
5
STEP
4
460
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating:
●The rightmost segment of the engine coolant temperature display is
flashing or a loss of power is experienced.
●Steam comes out from under the hood.
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of
your vehicle
●If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus-
ing serious injuries such as burns.
●Keep hands and clothing away from the fans and drive belt while the
engine is running.
●Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are
hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam
released under pressure.
Add engine coolant if neces-
sary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if engine coolant is
unavailable. (P. 471)
Have the vehicle checked at the nearest Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
STEP
5
5
When trouble arises
461
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too
quickly can cause damage to the engine.
462
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
CAUTION
■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur-
rounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The
vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free.
Use extreme caution.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■To avoid damage to the transmission and other components
●Avoid spinning the wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more
than necessary.
●If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,
the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to P.
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material under the tires
to help provide traction.
Restart the engine.
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and carefully apply
the accelerator to free the vehicle.
Turn off TRAC and VSC if these functions are hampering your
attempts to free the vehicle. (P. 204)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
5
When trouble arises
463
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following pro-
cedure:
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the
road.
Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce
vehicle speed as much as possible.
Vehicles without a smart key
system: Stop the engine by
turning the engine switch to
the “ACC” position.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
3
STEP
4
464
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■If the engine has to be turned off while driving
●Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the
brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.
Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
●Vehicles without a smart key system: Never attempt to remove the key, as
doing so will lock the steering wheel.
Vehicles with a smart key sys-
tem: To stop the engine, press
and hold the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch for 2 consecu-
tive seconds or more, or press
it briefly 3 times or more in
succession.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
STEP
4
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more,
or press briefly 3 times or more
STEP
5
466
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
*1: Unladen vehicles
*2: P215/55R17 and P225/45R18 tires
*3: P205/65R16 tires
Vehicle identification
■Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is located on the
top left of the instrument panel.
Overall length 189.2 in. (4805 mm)
Overall width 71.7 in. (1820 mm)
Overall height*157.9 in. (1470 mm)
Wheelbase 109.3 in. (2775 mm)
Tread
Front 62.0 in. (1575 mm)*2
62.4 in. (1585 mm)*3
Rear 61.6 in. (1565 mm)*2
62.0 in. (1575 mm)*3
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage) 905 lb. (410 kg)
467
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
This number is also on the Certi-
fication Label.
■Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
468
6-1. Specifications
Engine
Fuel
Model 2AR-FE 2GR-FE
Type 4-cylinder in line,
4-cycle, gasoline
6-cylinder V type,
4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.54 3.86 in.
(90.0 98.0 mm)
3.70 3.27 in.
(94.0 83.0 mm)
Displacement 152.2 cu.in. (2494 cm3) 210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Valve clearance
(engine cold) Automatic adjustment
NOTICE
■Drive belt type (2.5 L 4-cylinder [2AR-FE] engine only)
The high strength drive belt is used for the generator side drive belt.
When replacing the drive belt, use Toyota genuine drive belt or equivalent
high strength drive belt. If the high strength drive belt is not used, durability
of the belt may become less than expected. The high strength drive belt is a
belt with Aramid core which has higher strength compared to usually avail-
able belts with PET or PEN core.
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 17.0 gal. (64.35 L, 14.2 Imp. gal.)
469
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Lubrication system
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the
engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and
check the oil level on the dipstick.
■Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill refer-
ence*)
With filter
Without filter
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
4.6 qt. (4.4 L, 3.9 Imp. qt.)
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.4 Imp. qt.)
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
4.2 qt. (4.0 L, 3.5 Imp. qt.)
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp. qt.)
Outside temperature
470
6-1. Specifications
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows
cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier
starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when
the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a
higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high
speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
471
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Cooling system
Ignition system
Capacity
(Reference)
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
7.7 qt. (7.3 L, 6.4 Imp. qt.)
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
9.7 qt. (9.2 L, 8.1 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• A similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-sili-
cate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Spark plug
Make
Gap
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
DENSO SK16HR11
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
DENSO FK20HR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
472
6-1. Specifications
Electrical system
Automatic transaxle
*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is neces-
sary, contact your Toyota dealer.
Battery
Open voltage* at
68F (20C):
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged
(*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the
engine and all the lights are turned off)
Charging rates 5 A max.
Fluid capacity* 6.9 qt. (6.5 L, 5.7 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■Transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause
deterioration in shift quality, locking up of the transmission accompanied by
vibration and, ultimately, damage to the vehicle’s transmission.
473
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Brakes
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N,
51 kgf) while the engine is running
*2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67 lbf (300 N, 31
kgf).
Pedal clearance*13.8 in. (96 mm)
Pedal free play 0.04 0.24 in. (1 6 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake pedal travel*27 10 clicks
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
474
6-1. Specifications
Steering
Tires and wheels
16-inch tires
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Tire size P205/65R16 94S, T155/70D17 110M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph
[160 km/h]) (in countries where such
speeds are permitted by law)
Add 3 psi (20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) to
the front tires and rear tires. Never
exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size 16 6 1/2 JJ, 17 4 T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
475
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
17-inch tires
Tire size P215/55R17 93V, T155/70D17 110M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph
[160 km/h]) (in countries where such
speeds are permitted by law)
Add 6 psi (40 kPa, 0.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) to
the front tires and rear tires. Never
exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size 17 7 J, 17 4 T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
476
6-1. Specifications
18-inch tires
Tire size P225/45R18 91V, T155/70D17 110M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph
[160 km/h]) (in countries where such
speeds are permitted by law)
Add 6 psi (40 kPa, 0.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) to
the front tires and rear tires. Never
exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size 18 7 1/2 J, 17 4 T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
477
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Light bulbs
*: If equipped
A: H11 halogen bulbs B: HB3 halogen bulbs
C: D4S discharge bulbs D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
E: Wedge base bulbs (amber) F: Double end bulbs
Light Bulbs Bulb No. WType
Exterior
Headlights
Low beam
(halogen bulbs)*
Low beam
(discharge bulbs)*
High beam
9005
55
35
60
A
C
B
Front side marker
lights 5D
Rear side marker
lights 5D
Front turn signal/
parking lights 28/8 E
Rear turn signal lights 21 E
Stop/tail lights 21/5 D
License plate lights 5D
Back-up lights 921 16 D
Fog lights* 55 A
Interior
Interior/front personal
lights 5D
Interior/rear personal
lights* 8D
Rear interior light* 8F
Door courtesy lights 168 5 D
Vanity lights* 8D
Trunk light 194 3.8 D
478
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gas-
oline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of
gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
■Gasoline quality standards
●Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have devel-
oped a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter
(WWFC), which is expected to be applied worldwide.
●The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emis-
sion levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
●The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets,
and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use
of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result
in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications
of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
479
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
■Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
●Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives
to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.
●All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains detergent additives to clean and/
or keep clean intake systems.
■Recommendation of the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxy-
genates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in
many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately
blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent
vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
●If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no
lower than 87.
●Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
●Use only gasoline containing a maxi-
mum of 10% ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 10% etha-
nol, including from any pump labeled
E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only
some examples of fuel containing more
than 10% ethanol).
DO NOT use gasoline
containing more than 10%
ethanol.
(15% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
480
6-1. Specifications
■Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methyl-
cyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel
containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely
affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If
this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
■If your engine knocks
●Consult your Toyota dealer.
●You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler-
ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
NOTICE
■Notice on fuel quality
●Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be
damaged.
●Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic
converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
●Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
●Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the
level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot
starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type
of fuel.
■When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
481
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Full-size tire
Compact spare tire
Tire size (P. 484)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P. 483)
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Location of treadwear indicators (P. 367)
482
6-1. Specifications
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the
strands which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the
tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube main-
tains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 371)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 474)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Summer tires or all season tires (P. 371)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“M+S” is a summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” (P. 442)
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary
emergency use only.
483
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identifica-
tion mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies
that the tire conforms to
applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
484
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
■Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
485
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.
■DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
486
6-1. Specifications
■Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
■Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,
and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turn-
ing) traction.
■Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, represent-
ing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labo-
ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
487
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly
inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under
that condition
Maximum inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a
tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of
the tire
Recommended infla-
tion pressure Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those stan-
dard items which may be replaced) of auto-
matic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio
and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional
engine
Maximum loaded vehi-
cle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
488
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Normal occupant
weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1* that
follows
Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci-
fied in the third column of Table 1* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular pro-
duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim
Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation The industry manufacturer's designation for a
rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity
weight (Total load
capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating
capacity
Vehicle maximum load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing
by two
Vehicle normal load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight (distributed in accordance with
Table 1* below), and dividing by two
489
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components
in the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles
substantially less than 90 degrees to the cen-
terline of the tread
Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-
pounds
Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-
liner of the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire
and rim system in which the rim is designed
with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the
tire is designed to fit on the underside of the
rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges
inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire
490
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufac-
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asym-
metrical tire that has a particular side that
must always face outward when mounted
on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as prima-
rily intended for use on lightweight trucks or
multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements
Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including eleva-
tions due to labeling, decorations, or protective
bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, mul-
tipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that
have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
10,000 lb. or less.
491
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adja-
cent plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi-
cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro-
vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load
Radial ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding ele-
vations due to labeling, decoration, or protec-
tive bands
Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead
Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-
1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line
on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which
is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at
least one sidewall
Test rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire
492
6-1. Specifications
*:Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load
for various designated seating capacities
Tire related term Meaning
Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road
Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire
Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehi-
cle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second
seat
11 through 15 5 2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
16 through 20 7 2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
493
6
Vehicle specifications
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Customizable Features
Vehicles with a Display Audio system: Settings that can be
changed using the Display Audio system
(For further information on customizing settings using the Display
Audio system, refer to the “Display Audio System Owner’s Man-
ual”.)
Vehicles with a navigation system: Settings that can be changed
using the navigation system
(For further information on customizing settings using the naviga-
tion system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)
Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per-
sonalized to suit your preferences. Programming these preferences
requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your
Toyota dealer.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
494
6-2. Customization
Item Function Default set-
ting
Customized
setting
Smart key
system*1
and wire-
less remote
control
(P. 32,
46)
Operation sig-
nal
(Emergency
flashers)
On Off — O O
Operation sig-
nal
(Buzzer)
On Off — — O
Operation
buzzer volume Level 5 Off to level 7 O O O
Time elapsed
before auto-
matic door lock
function is acti-
vated if door is
not opened
after being
unlocked
60 seconds
Off
—OO30 seconds
120 seconds
Open door
warning buzzer On Off — — O
Smart key
system*1
(P. 32)
Smart key sys-
tem On Off — — O
Number of per-
missible times
of continuous
smart lock
Twice Unlimited — — O
495
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Wireless
remote
control
(P. 46)
Wireless
remote control On Off — — O
Unlocking
operation
Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
All doors
unlocked in
one step.
OOO
Panic function On Off — — O
Trunk unlock-
ing operation
Press and
hold (short)
Off
——O
Press twice
One short
press
Press and
hold (long)
Item Function Default set-
ting
Customized
setting
496
6-2. Customization
Door lock
(P. 52)
Unlocking
using a key
Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
All doors
unlocked in
one step.
—OO
Speed-detect-
ing automatic
door lock func-
tion
Off On OOO
Opening
driver's door
unlocks all
doors
Off On — O O
Shifting gears
to P unlocks all
doors.
On Off OOO
Shifting gears
to position
other than P
locks all doors.
On Off OOO
Automatic
light con-
trol sys-
tem*1
(P. 185)
Light sensor
sensitivity Level 3 Level 1 to 5 O O O
Time elapsed
before head-
lights automati-
cally turn off
after doors are
closed
30 seconds
0 seconds
OOO
60 seconds
90 seconds
Lights
(P. 185)
Daytime run-
ning light sys-
tem (except
Canada)
On Off OOO
Item Function Default set-
ting
Customized
setting
497
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Illumination
(P. 285)
Time elapsed
before lights
turn off
15 seconds
Off
—OO7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation
when the doors
are unlocked
On Off — — O
Vehicles with-
out smart key
system: Opera-
tion after the
engine switch
turned to the
“LOCK” posi-
tion
Vehicles with
smart key sys-
tem: Operation
after the
“ENGINE
START STOP”
switch turned
off
On Off — — O
Operation
when you
approach the
vehicle with the
electronic key
on your per-
son*2
On Off — — O
Seat belt
reminder
(P. 423)
Vehicle speed
linked seat belt
reminder
buzzer
On Off — — O
Item Function Default set-
ting
Customized
setting
498
6-2. Customization
*1: If equipped
*2: Vehicles with a smart key system
Automatic
air condi-
tioning sys-
tem*1
(P. 233)
Switching
between out-
side air and
recirculated air
mode linked to
“AUTO” switch
operation
Auto Manual — O O
A/C auto switch
operation Auto Manual — O O
Power win-
dow
(driver’s
door) &
moon
roof*1
(P. 81,
84)
Key linked
opening Off On — — O
Wireless
remote control
linked opening
Off On — — O
Key linked clos-
ing Off On — — O
Wireless
remote control
linked opening
buzzer
On Off — — O
Moon
roof*1
(P. 84)
Linked opera-
tion of compo-
nents when
door key is
used
Slide only Tilt only ——O
Linked opera-
tion of compo-
nents when
wireless
remote control
is used
Slide only Tilt only ——O
Item Function Default set-
ting
Customized
setting
499
6
Vehicle specifications
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
Maintenance data After the maintenance is performed P. 340
Tire pressure warning
system (U.S.A. only)
• When changing tire pressure (such
as when changing traveling speed,
load weight, etc.)
• When changing the tire size
P. 368
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation
after such cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance
being performed on the vehicle:
500
6-3. Initialization
502
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free:
1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
503
7
For owners
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions
extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
●Tendez la sangle diagonale de
sorte qu'elle couvre
complètement l'épaule, sans
entrer en contact avec le cou
ou glisser de l'épaule.
●Placez la sangle abdominale
le plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
●Réglez la position du dossier
de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos
le plus droit possible et calez-
vous bien dans le siège.
●Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
504
Entretien et soin
■Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont
pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
■Ceinture de sécurité arrière
ATTENTION
■Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne
sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas
desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle
ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune
garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident.
Si la ceinture de sécurité est sortie de son
guide, repassez-la dedans avant de
l'utiliser.
505
7
For owners
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions
extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instruc-
tions in English.
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS frontaux
Sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur/sac de sécurité gonflable
passager avant SRS
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur
et du passager avant contre les chocs avec les éléments de
l'habitacle
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS de genoux
Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant
506
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux et rideau
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux avant
Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants assis
aux places avant
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux arrière
Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants assis
aux places arrière extérieures
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS rideau
Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des
occupants assis aux places extérieures
507
7
For owners
Composition du système de sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
Capteurs d'impact avant
Système de classification
des occupants du siège
passager avant (ECU et
capteurs)
Sac de sécurité gonflable
de genoux
Capteurs d'impact latéral
(porte avant)
Capteurs d'impact latéral
(avant)
Sac de sécurité gonflable
passager avant
Sacs de sécurité gonflables
latéraux avant
Sacs de sécurité gonflables
rideau
Sacs de sécurité gonflables
latéraux arrière
Témoins indicateurs “AIR
BAG ON” et “AIR BAG
OFF”
Témoin d'alerte SRS
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité
passager avant
Boîtier électronique de sacs
de sécurité gonflables
Capteurs d'impact latéral
(arrière)
Sac de sécurité gonflable
conducteur
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité
conducteur
Prétensionneurs de
ceintures de sécurité et
limiteurs de force
508
Votre véhicule est équipé de SACS DE SECURITE GONFLABLES
INTELLIGENTS (ADVANCED AIRBAGS) conçus selon les normes
de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur
(FMVSS208). Le boîtier électronique (ECU) des sacs de sécurité
gonflables régule le déploiement de ces derniers sur la base des
informations qu'il reçoit des capteurs, etc., indiqués ci-dessus dans le
schéma illustrant la composition du système. Parmi ces informations
figurent la gravité du choc et l'occupation du véhicule par les
passagers. Le déploiement rapide des sacs de sécurité gonflables
est obtenu au moyen d'une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs
pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d'amortir le
mouvement des occupants.
509
7
For owners
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS.
À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s'ensuivre.
●Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur
ceinture de sécurité correctement.
Les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs de protection
complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité.
●Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une
violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le
conducteur se trouve très près du sac de sécurité gonflable.
L'autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis, la
NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) conseille:
Sachant que la zone à risque du sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur se
trouve dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) de déploiement, vous
disposez d'une marge de sécurité confortable en vous plaçant à 10 in.
(250 mm) de votre sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur. Cette distance
est à mesurer entre le moyeu du volant de direction et le sternum. Si vous
êtes assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre
position de conduite de plusieurs façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, tout en continuant à pouvoir
atteindre confortablement les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Bien que les véhicules puissent être différents les uns des autres, la
plupart des conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de 10 in.
(250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé,
simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des
difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez un
coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou, si votre
véhicule est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le.
• Si votre volant de direction est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a
pour effet d'orienter le sac de sécurité gonflable en direction de votre
poitrine plutôt que de votre tête et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon ces recommandations de la NHTSA, tout en
conservant le contrôle des pédales et du volant de direction, et la vue des
commandes du tableau de bord.
510
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
●Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS passager avant se déploie également
avec une violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire
mortelle si le passager avant se trouve très près du sac de sécurité
gonflable. Éloignez le siège passager avant au maximum du sac de
sécurité gonflable, et réglez le dossier de siège de sorte à être assis bien
droit dans le siège.
●Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou
protégés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un
sac de sécurité gonflable. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les
enfants trop jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. Toyota
recommande vivement que les nourrissons et les jeunes enfants soient
installés sur le siège arrière du véhicule et convenablement attachés. Les
sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le
siège passager avant.
●Si vous attachez une rallonge de
ceinture de sécurité aux boucles de
ceinture de sécurité avant, mais pas au
pêne de la ceinture de sécurité, les
sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
frontaux détectent que le conducteur et
le passager avant ont attaché leur
ceinture de sécurité, alors même que
ce n'est pas le cas. Dans ce cas, il se
peut que les sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS frontaux ne se
déploient pas correctement en cas
d'accident, et vous risquez d'être tué ou
grièvement blessé. Veillez donc à
porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la
rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.
511
7
For owners
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
●N'installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le
siège passager avant, même si le témoin indicateur “AIR BAG OFF” est
allumé. En cas d'accident, par la violence et la vitesse de son
déploiement, le sac de sécurité gonflable passager avant peut blesser
grièvement, voire tuer l'enfant si vous l'avez installé à la place du passager
avant dans un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route.
●Ne pas s'asseoir sur le bord du siège et
ne pas s'appuyer contre la planche de
bord.
●Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout
devant le sac de sécurité gonflable
SRS passager avant ou bien s'asseoir
sur les genoux du passager avant.
●Ne laissez pas les occupants des
sièges avant voyager avec un objet sur
les genoux.
●Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte,
contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les
montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
512
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
●Interdisez à quiconque de s'agenouiller
sur les sièges passagers en appui
contre la porte ou de sortir la tête ou les
mains à l'extérieur du véhicule.
●Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur la
planche de bord, la garniture centrale
du moyeu de volant de direction et la
partie inférieure du tableau de bord.
Au déploiement des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS conducteur, passager
avant et genoux, tout objet risque de se
transformer en projectile.
●Ne rien fixer aux portes, à la vitre de
pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, aux
montants avant et arrière, au rail latéral
de toit et à la poignée de maintien.
●Véhicules dépourvus de système
d'accès et de démarrage “mains libres”:
Évitez d'attacher au porte-clés de la clé
de contact des objets lourds, pointus ou
très durs, comme d'autres clés par
exemple. Ces objets risquent d'entraver
le déploiement du sac de sécurité
gonflable SRS de genoux ou d'être
projetés vers le siège conducteur par la
force de déploiement, constituant ainsi
un danger potentiel.
513
7
For owners
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
●Ne suspendez aux crochets à vêtements aucun cintre nu ni aucun objet
dur. En cas de déploiement des sacs de sécurité gonflables rideau SRS,
tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et causer des
blessures graves, voire mortelles.
●Si une housse en vinyle recouvre la partie où le sac de sécurité gonflable
SRS de genoux se déploie, veillez à l'enlever.
●N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de
déploiement des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux, car il risquerait
d'en gêner le déploiement. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les
sacs de sécurité gonflables latéraux de fonctionner correctement,
désactiver le dispositif ou entraîner le déploiement accidentel des sacs de
sécurité latéraux, entraînant la mort ou des blessures graves.
●Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux zones
renfermant les composants des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS.
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des sacs de
sécurité gonflables SRS.
●Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le
déclenchement (déploiement) des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, car ils
sont alors encore très chauds.
●Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des sacs de
sécurité gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de
l'air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de
danger. Essuyez tout résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles
irritations de la peau.
●Si les parties renfermant les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, telles que la
garniture du moyeu de volant et les garnitures de montants avant et
arrière, apparaissent abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par
votre concessionnaire Toyota.
514
ATTENTION
■Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système de sacs de
sécurité gonflables SRS
Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Toyota si vous avez besoin
d'intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l'une des modifications
suivantes. Les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS risquent de ne pas
fonctionner correctement ou de se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement,
provoquant ainsi des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
●Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS
●Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du
tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage,
des montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit
●Réparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du bouclier avant, ou des
flancs de l'habitacle
●Installation de chasse-neige, de treuils, etc., sur la calandre (pare-buffle
ou pare-kangourou, etc.)
●Modification des suspensions du véhicule
●Installation d'appareils électroniques, tels qu'un radioémetteur/récepteur
ou d'un lecteur CD
●Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une
personne atteinte d'un handicap physique
Index
515
Abbreviation list ..................... 516
Alphabetical index.................. 518
What to do if... ........................ 528
Vehicles with a Display Audio system:
For details of equipment related to the Display Audio
system, such as the audio system, refer to the “Display
Audio System Owner's Manual”.
Vehicles with a navigation system:
For details of equipment related to the navigation sys-
tem, such as the audio system, refer to the “Navigation
System Owner's Manual”.
516
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
A/C Air Conditioning
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
ACC Accessory
AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence Shift control
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
BSM Blind Spot Monitor
CRS Child Restraint System
ECO Economy/Ecology
ECU Electronic Control Unit
EDR Event data recorder
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
EPS Electric Power Steering
GAWR Gross Axle Weight Ratings
GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
517
Abbreviation list
I/M Emission inspection and maintenance
LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED Light Emitting Diode
M + S Mud and Snow
MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD On Board Diagnostics
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
TIN Tire Identification Number
TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System
TRAC Traction Control
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
518
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C.....................................226, 233
ABS ...........................................203
Air conditioning filter...............382
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter..............382
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................233
Manual air conditioning
system ................................226
Airbags
Airbag operating
conditions............................103
Airbag precautions for
your child ............................108
Airbag warning light...............421
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions............104
Curtain shield airbag
precautions .........................108
Front passenger occupant
classification system...........113
General airbag
precautions .........................108
Locations of airbags..............100
Modification and disposal of
airbags................................112
Proper driving posture.....98, 108
Side airbag operating
conditions............................104
Side airbag precautions ........108
SRS airbags..........................100
Alarm...........................................95
Antenna ....................................250
Anti-lock brake system ...........203
Armrest.....................................309
Ashtray .....................................303
Audio input...............264, 272, 283
Audio system
Antenna.................................250
Audio input............264, 272, 283
AUX adapter .........................283
CD player..............................251
iPod.......................................264
MP3/WMA disc .....................257
Optimal use...........................280
Portable music
player..................264, 272, 283
Radio.....................................248
Type......................................242
USB memory.........................272
Automatic air conditioning
system....................................233
Automatic light control
system....................................185
Automatic transmission
Automatic
transmission ...............155, 159
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P .....................449
S mode..........................156, 162
AUX port ...................................283
Auxiliary boxes ........................296
A
519
Alphabetical index
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 401
Wattage................................ 477
Battery
Checking .............................. 363
If the vehicle has
discharged battery ............. 454
Preparing and checking
before winter ...................... 218
Blind Spot Monitor.................. 208
Bottle holders.......................... 293
Brake
Fluid...................................... 361
Parking brake....................... 167
Brake assist............................. 203
Break-in tips ............................ 135
BSM .......................................... 208
Care
Exterior..................................334
Interior...................................337
Seat belts ..............................338
Cargo capacity .........................213
Cargo net ..................................314
CD player ..................................251
Chains.......................................218
Child-protectors.........................54
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition........118
Booster seats, installation.....122
Convertible seats,
definition .............................118
Convertible seats,
installation...........................122
Front passenger occupant
classification system...........113
Infant seats, definition ...........118
Infant seats, installation.........122
Installing CRS with LATCH
anchors...............................123
Installing CRS with
seat belts ............................125
Installing CRS with top
tether straps........................128
B
C
520
Alphabetical index
Child safety
Airbag precautions................108
Battery precautions.......364, 457
Child restraint system............118
Child-protectors.......................54
How your child should wear
the seat belt..........................71
Installing child restraints........122
Moon roof precautions ............87
Power window lock switch.......81
Power window precautions .....83
Removed key battery
precautions .........................387
Seat belt extender
precautions ...........................75
Seat belt precautions ..............73
Seat heater precautions........308
Trunk precautions ...................60
Cleaning
Exterior..................................334
Interior...................................337
Seat belts ..............................338
Clock .........................................300
Coin holder...............................292
Compass...................................322
Condenser ................................361
Console box .............................291
Cooling system
Engine overheating ...............459
Cruise control...........................199
Cup holder................................294
Curtain shield airbags .............100
Customizable features.............493
Daytime running light
system....................................189
Defogger
Outside rear view mirror........240
Rear window .........................240
Dimensions ..............................466
Dinghy towing..........................223
Do-it-yourself
maintenance ..........................347
Door courtesy light
Door courtesy light................285
Wattage.................................477
Doors
Door lock.....................32, 46, 52
Door windows .........................81
Outside rear view mirrors........79
Driver's seat belt reminder
light.........................................423
Driving
Break-in tips..........................135
Correct posture .......................98
Procedures............................134
Winter driving tips .................218
D
521
Alphabetical index
Electric power steering........... 203
Electronic key
If the electronic key does
not operate properly........... 451
Emergency flashers
Switch................................... 414
Emergency, in case of
If a warning light turns on ..... 420
If the electronic key does
not operate properly........... 451
If the engine will not start...... 447
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P..................... 449
If the vehicle has
discharged battery ............. 454
If the warning buzzer
sounds ............................... 420
If you have a flat tire ............ 435
If you lose your keys............. 450
If you think something is
wrong ................................. 418
If your vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 462
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency... 463
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ............................ 415
If your vehicle overheats ...... 459
Engine
Compartment ........................353
Engine switch................145, 148
Hood......................................350
How to start the
engine.........................145, 148
Identification number.............466
If the engine will not start ......447
Ignition switch................145, 148
Overheating...........................459
Engine coolant
Capacity ................................471
Checking ...............................360
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................218
Engine coolant temperature
display ....................................169
Engine immobilizer system.......92
Engine oil
Capacity ................................469
Checking ...............................355
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................218
Engine switch light ..................285
EPS............................................203
Event data recorder ...................22
E
522
Alphabetical index
Floor mat...................................311
Fluid
Brake.....................................361
Washer..................................366
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs.............401
Switch....................................192
Wattage.................................477
Front fog lights
Replacing light bulbs.............401
Switch....................................192
Wattage.................................477
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............113
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light.........................423
Front seats
Adjustment ..............................62
Front side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs.............401
Wattage.................................477
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............401
Wattage.................................477
Fuel
Capacity ................................468
Fuel gauge ............................169
Fuel pump shut off system....419
Gas station information .........532
Information ............................478
Refueling.................................88
Type ......................................468
Fuel door.....................................88
Fuel filler door............................88
Fuel pump shut off system.....419
Fuses.........................................389
Garage door opener ................315
Gas station information ..........532
Gauges......................................169
Glove box .................................290
Grocery bag hooks..................313
Hazard lights
Switch ...................................414
Head restraints
Adjusting ................................67
Headlights
Replacing light bulbs.............401
Switch ...................................185
Wattage.................................477
Heaters
Outside rear view mirror........240
Seat heater ...........................307
Hood..........................................350
Hooks
Cargo net hooks....................314
Grocery bag hooks................313
Horn ..........................................168
F
G
H
523
Alphabetical index
I/M test...................................... 346
Identification number
Engine .................................. 466
Vehicle.................................. 466
Ignition switch................. 145, 148
Illuminated entry system........ 288
Indicator lights ........................ 179
Initialization
Items to initialize................... 499
Inside rear view mirror.............. 77
Interior lights
Interior lights......................... 285
Switch................................... 286
Wattage................................ 477
Jack
Positioning a floor jack ......... 351
Vehicle-equipped jack .......... 435
Jack handle.............................. 435
Keyless entry............................. 46
Keys
Electronic key......................... 28
Engine switch ............... 145, 148
If the electronic key does
not operate properly........... 451
If you lose your keys............. 450
Ignition switch............... 145, 148
Key number............................ 28
Keyless entry.......................... 46
Keys ....................................... 28
Mechanical key....................... 28
Wireless remote control key... 46
License plate lights
Replacing light bulbs.............401
Wattage.................................477
Light bulbs
Replacing ..............................401
Wattage.................................477
Lights
Door courtesy lights ..............285
Emergency flasher switch .....414
Fog light switch .....................192
Hazard light switch................414
Headlights switch ..................185
Interior light switch ................286
Personal light switch .............287
Replacing light bulbs.............401
Turn signal lever....................166
Vanity lights...........................299
Wattage.................................477
Load capacity...........................217
Lock steering column......146, 152
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself
maintenance .......................347
General maintenance............342
Maintenance data..................466
Maintenance requirements....340
Reset the maintenance
data.....................................340
Manual air conditioning
system ....................................226
Meter
Instrument panel light
control.................................175
Meters ...................................169
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror.............77
Outside rear view mirror
defogger..............................240
Outside rear view mirrors........79
Vanity mirrors........................299
Moon roof ...................................84
MP3 disc ...................................257
I
J
K
L
M
524
Alphabetical index
Noise from under vehicle..........19
Odometer..................................169
Oil
Engine oil ..............................355
Opener
Fuel filler door .........................88
Hood......................................350
Trunk.......................................58
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding...............79
Defogger ...............................240
Outside temperature
display ....................................301
Overheating, Engine................459
Parking brake ...........................167
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs.............401
Switch....................................185
Wattage.................................477
Personal lights
Switch....................................287
Wattage.................................477
Power outlet .............................304
Power windows..........................81
Radiator ....................................361
Radio.........................................248
Rear seats
Folding down...........................65
Rear side marker lights
Replacing light bulb...............401
Switch....................................185
Wattage.................................477
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............401
Wattage.................................477
Rear view mirror
Compass...............................322
Rear window defogger ............240
Replacing
Fuses ....................................389
Key battery............................384
Light bulbs.............................401
Tires......................................435
Reporting safety defects for
U.S.A. owners ........................502
Safety Connect.........................326
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt.............69
Automatic Locking
Retractor...............................71
Child restraint system
installation...........................122
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts ......................338
Emergency Locking
Retractor...............................71
How to wear your seat belt .....69
How your child should wear
the seat belt..........................71
Pregnant women,
proper seat belt use..............71
Reminder light.......................423
Seat belt extenders.................72
Seat belt pretensioners...........70
Seat heaters .............................307
Seating capacity ......................217
N
O
P
R
S
525
Alphabetical index
Seats
Adjustment ............................. 62
Adjustment precautions.......... 64
Child seats/child restraint
system installation.............. 122
Cleaning ............................... 337
Head restraint......................... 67
Properly sitting in the seat...... 98
Rear seat folding down........... 65
Seat heaters......................... 307
Service reminder
indicators .............................. 179
Shift lever
Automatic
transmission............... 155, 159
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P................ 449
Shift lock system..................... 449
Side airbags............................. 100
Side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 401
Switch................................... 185
Wattage................................ 477
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding.............. 79
Defogger............................... 240
Smart key system
Entry function ......................... 32
Starting the engine ............... 148
Spare tire
Inflation pressure.................. 375
Storage location ................... 435
Spark plug................................ 471
Specifications.......................... 466
Speedometer ........................... 169
Steering
Column lock release......146, 152
Steering wheel
Adjustment ..............................76
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs.............401
Wattage.................................477
Storage feature.........................289
Storage precautions ................213
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................462
Sun visors.................................298
Sunshade
Roof.........................................85
Switch
Emergency flasher switch .....414
Engine switch................145, 148
Fog light switch .....................192
Hazard light switch................414
Ignition switch................145, 148
Light switches........................185
Power door lock switch ...........52
Power window switch..............81
Window lock switch.................81
Wiper and washer switch ......194
526
Alphabetical index
Tachometer...............................169
Tail lights
Replacing light bulbs.............401
Switch....................................185
Wattage.................................477
Theft deterrent system
Alarm.......................................95
Engine immobilizer system .....92
Tire inflation pressure .............375
Tire information
Glossary................................487
Size .......................................484
Tire identification number......483
Uniform tire quality
grading................................485
Tires
Chains...................................218
Checking ...............................367
If you have a flat tire..............435
Inflation pressure...................375
Inflation pressure sensor.......368
Replacing ..............................435
Rotating tires.........................367
Size .......................................474
Snow tires .............................218
Spare tire...............................435
Tools .........................................435
Total load capacity ..................217
Towing
Dinghy towing .......................223
Trailer towing ........................222
TRAC.........................................203
Traction control .......................203
Trip information .......................169
Trip meter .................................169
Trunk
Opener....................................58
Trunk light
Trunk light ...............................59
Wattage.................................477
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............401
Switch ...................................166
Wattage.................................477
Valet key .....................................28
Vanity lights
Vanity lights...........................299
Wattage.................................477
Vanity mirrors ..........................299
Vehicle data recordings ............21
Vehicle identification
number ...................................466
Vehicle stability control ..........203
VSC ...........................................203
T
V
527
Alphabetical index
Warning buzzers
Brake system........................ 420
Downshifting................. 158, 164
Electric power steering
system................................ 421
Open door ............................ 423
Seat belt reminder................ 423
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system ......... 421
Blind Spot Monitor................ 421
Brake assist system ............. 421
Brake system........................ 420
Charging system .................. 421
Cruise control indicator
light .................................... 421
Electric power steering
system................................ 421
Engine coolant
temperature........................ 421
Engine oil pressure............... 421
Low fuel level........................ 423
Maintenance reminder
light .................................... 423
Malfunction indicator lamp.... 421
Open door ............................ 423
Pretensioners ....................... 421
Seat belt reminder light ........ 423
Slip indicator......................... 421
Smart key system................. 427
SRS airbags ......................... 421
Tire pressure warning
light .................................... 423
Washer fluid ......................... 423
Washer
Checking ...............................366
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................218
Switch....................................194
Washing and waxing ...............334
Weight
Cargo capacity ......................213
Load limits.............................217
Weight...................................466
Wheels ......................................379
Window glasses ........................81
Window lock switch...................81
Windows
Power windows .......................81
Rear window defogger ..........240
Washer..................................194
Windshield wipers ...................194
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery............384
Wireless remote control ..........46
WMA disc..................................257
W
528
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 435 If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
P. 447 If the engine will not start
P. 92 Engine immobilizer system
P. 454 If the battery is discharged
P. 451 If the electronic key does not oper-
ate properly
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 449
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P
The rightmost segment of the engine
coolant temperature display flashes
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
P. 459 If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 450 If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 454 If the battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 52 Doors
The horn begins to sound
P. 95 Alarm
The vehicle is stuck in
mud or sand
P. 462 If the vehicle becomes stuck
530
What to do if...
■Warning lights
P. 421
or
P. 4 20 P. 421
P. 4 21 P. 423
P. 4 21 P. 423
P. 423
or
P. 4 21 P. 423
P. 4 21 P. 423
P. 421
or
P. 4 21 P. 421
Brake system warning
light
Cruise control indicator
light*1
Slip indicator light
Charging system warn-
ing light
Tire pressure warning
light
Low engine oil pressure
warning light
Low windshield washer fluid
warning light
Malfunction indicator
lamp
Open door warning light
Low fuel level warning
light
SRS warning light
Driver’s/front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
ABS warning light
Electric power steering sys-
tem warning light
BSM warning light
531
What to do if...
P. 4 23 P. 421
or
P. 421
*1: The light comes on in yellow to indicate a malfunction.
*2: The light flashes in yellow to indicate a malfunction. The light flashes
quickly in green to indicate that the steering lock has not been
released.
Maintenance required
reminder light
Smart key system indi-
cator light*2
High engine cool-
ant temperature
warning light (the
rightmost seg-
ment of the engine
coolant tempera-
ture display
flashes)
532
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 350
Trunk opener
P. 5 8
Fuel filler door
P. 8 8
Hood lock release lever
P. 3 50
Fuel filler door opener
P. 8 8
Tire inflation pressure
P. 474
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 17.0 gal. (64.35 L, 14.2 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P. 468
Cold tire inflation pressure P. 474
Engine oil
capacity
(Drain and refill
reference)
2.5 L 4-cyl-
inder
(2AR-FE)
engine
qt. (L, Imp. qt.)
With filter 4.6 (4.4, 3.9)
Without filter 4.2 (4.0, 3.5)
3.5 L V6
(2GR-FE)
engine
With filter 6.4 (6.1, 5.4)
Without filter 6.0 (5.7, 5.0)
Engine oil type P. 469
